
JOHN - TALBOT ’SMITH 




COPYRIGHT DEPOSIT. 























t 


THE BOY WHO CAME BACK 


BY THE SAME AUTHOR 


THE BOY WHO LOOKED AHEAD 
A Juvenile Story. Net $1.25 

“ It is indeed a fascinating story. It will 
please the boys who love adventure. And 
it will urge the youthful readers to aim 
high in life .” — Father Lasance. 

‘‘A book that will bring abounding glad- 
ness to the juvenile world .” — Father Finn. 

THE BLACK CARDINAL 
A Novel. Net $1.75 

A novel that is decidedly good — ^good 
in its absorbing interest, good in its tone, 
good as literature. 



THE BOY 
WHO CAME BACK 


JOHN TALBOT SMITH 

Author of “The Boy Who Looked Ahead/' 
“The Black Cardinal/’ etc. 



NEW YORK 

BLASE BENZIGER & CO., Inc. 


1921 



Copyright, 1921, by 
Blase Benziger & Co., Inc. 



NO'Jirzi 


§)C1.A630238 


I 


CONTENTS 


CHAPTER PAGE 

I A Queer Family 7 

II A Great Surprise . . . . , .15 

III The Worst Boy 20 

IV The Washing 27 

V A Coal and Wood Business .... 33 

VI Going to Church 40 

VII Getting Work 46 

VIII A Wicked Boy 53 

IX Trouble Begins 59 

X The Trouble Continues 65 

XI Arrested 72 

XII The Face at the Window .... 78 

XIII Out on Bail 84 

XI V The Runaways 90 

XV Night in the Woods 96 

XVI More Trouble 103 

XVII The Veiled Lady ...... 109 

XVIII The Queen 115 

XIX A Coward 122 

XX A Warning 128 

XXI Going Down 134 

XXII The Lawn Party 14 1 

XXIII The Diamond Ring 147 

XXIV The Thief .154 

XXV The Investigation 160 

5 


6 


Contents 


CHAPTER PAGE 

XXVI The Last Struggle i66 

XXVII The Last Stand 172 

XXVIII Afloat 178 

XXIX The First Communion 184 

XXX A Surprising Event 190 

XXXI The Old House Restored . . . .197 

XXXII The Dream Comes True .... 204 

XXXIII The Bright Morning 21 1 


THE BOY WHO CAME BACK 


CHAPTER I 

A QUEER FAMILY 

R egina LAWTON was so young and strong 
that she never noticed the hardships of her way 
home each evening after the day’s work. She 
never even counted them, as did many people, who 
usually grew tired in brain before their legs had made 
the journey. First, Regina had to fly from the office 
at the last moment, pinning on loose things as she flew 
down the elevator, with not a minute to lose if she 
were to catch the right train ; then she had to fight her 
way through the crowded subway to the Grand Cen- 
tral station; next came a lively footrace for the train, 
with twenty miles of riding ahead. That was not so 
bad, for the coaches were warm and well lighted, and 
full of merry neighbors, and one could talk or read 
pleasantly all the w^ay. At the Silver Ferry station 
the rich were whisked away in automobiles, but the 
poor had to climb one hundred steps to the level of 
the main street. Regina had a pretty home, at least 
she thought it pretty in spite of its drawbacks. Once 
it had been a gentleman’s summer villa, and it stood 
in a park which sloped down to the river. The fence 
was half down, and the other half looked ragged. 
The park was full of weeds, lumber, and iron pipe, 
the trees looked weary and worried, the paint had 
worn off the house, amateur carpenters had patched 
and spoiled the broken places ; but still the whole place 
7 


8 


The Boy Who Came Back 

had the grand air of ancient glory. The back veranda 
looked out on the glorious Hudson, the rooms were 
high and spacious, and Regina knew that lovely ladies 
and noble gentlemen had walked and danced there 
long, long ago. The rent was very cheap, because 
the owner could get few people of respectability to 
rent it. He never repaired it, leaving that to the 
tenants. The Lawtons had possession now. Regina 
knew that they lacked respectability; not because they 
were poor, but rather because somehow they had gone 
to seed. Her father disappeared years ago after a 
foolish career and was supposed to be dead; her 
mother washed for a living, and the poor soul had 
epilepsy; her older brother, Lafayette, had been sent 
to a Home to keep him out of wild ways ; her younger 
brother, Rochambeau, was seeking a like fate ; and her 
sister. Wistaria, the baby of the family, had taken to 
idling instead of school. Regina had only just begun 
to wonder how they would all end. Her own wages 
and the poor mother's hard labor barely kept the 
family going. The children seemed to get worse as 
they grew older. For two years now she had gone 
on in a hopeless way, praying mildly that better luck 
might come to the Lawton family. Sometimes she 
thought of going away by herself, so as to have a 
little money and some peace, but in that case her dear 
mother would be left to bear the burden alone. And 
she was a good, loving soul. Her sickness had weak- 
ened her power over the children. She never missed 
a day at work, but she often missed correction of the 
children. And so one was in a Home, and one going 
to the bad, and a little girl growing up foolishly. Re- 
gina never knew what to expect when she arrived 
home at night. She knew just where Wistaria would 
be at this hour and went softly into the parlor to sur- 
prise her. It was surely a grand place, long and wide, 
with windows from the ceiling to the floor, great 


A Queer Family 


9 


cornices, gilt and crystal chandelier, noble mantels; 
but everything was broken, patched, soiled with age, 
only its dignity remained. Wistaria was there, but 
not declaiming as usual, only listening to strange 
noises coming up from the kitchen. She warned Re- 
gina with a gesture and whispered, 

“Now if you want to catch him at it, steal down- 
stairs. He has a whole ham.” 

“A whole ham ! Where did he get it ?” 

“Mrs. Letty sent it over to Mamma with her com- 
pliments. It was left over from the picnic. I told 
him to wait for you, but he would not. He says that 
he will cut it up in slices, make sandwiches, and sell 
them to the boys. He needs the money for some 
electric thing. We need the ham more.” 

“What did you have for lunch. Wistaria?” asked 
Regina. 

“Oh, I did very well, considering. I visited Mrs. 
Nolan about eleven. We had tea and cake over the 
washtub, and I paid her by helping her to hang out 
the clothes.” 

Regina blushed and frov/ned, but Wistaria paid no 
attention. She picked up her skirt and began to strut 
around the room, imitating a grand lady of court. 
Regina had to laugh, for her sister was only twelve. 
Her clothes were shabby, but she wore them grace- 
fully. No matter how the child dressed, every one 
took a second look at her. Just now she was wearing 
a wreath of leaves and flowers, carried a bouquet, and 
had a remnant of a lace curtain streaming from her 
shoulders over the floor. 

“This must be Ophelia that you're playing now,” 
said Regina. 

“Who’s Ophelia? Guess again.” 

“Then it’s the Mysterious Bride,” said Regina, pick- 
ing up a limp and ragged book and reading the title. 
“How can you read such stuff, Wis?” 


lo The Boy Who Came Back 

‘‘Are you going to save that ham, Regina 

The strange noises began again in the kitchen. Re- 
gina gathered up her packages, stole softly into the 
hall and down the stairs, stopping to listen at the 
kitchen door. Wistaria in her costume of the mys- 
terious bride followed in a lofty manner, studying 
proudly how her train floated behind. The kitchen 
was a large but low room, with a table in the center, 
a range at one end and dishes on shelves at the side. 
On a lounge lay Mrs. Lawton asleep. At the table 
stood a boy of fourteen looking at a full-sized ham. 
He wore glasses and his eyes were set deep in his 
head. His square face had a most determined look. 
Scattered around him on the floor and the chairs and 
the table were tools, wires, bottles and boxes in great 
confusion. He had just sharpened a carving knife 
with a steel, and was studying how to cut the ham into 
one hundred sandwiches, which at ten cents apiece 
would bring him ten dollars. When he saw Regina 
enter, he whisked away the ham to a wooden platter 
on the window sill, and stood on guard, brandishing 
the knife and fork. 

“Now will you?” said Wistaria in triumph. 

“Yes, I will,” he answered. “There’s the ham. It’s 
yours if you can take it. But I know you can’t.” 

Wistaria trailed her lace curtain to the window and 
examined some wires connected with the wooden 
platter on which lay the ham. 

“Yes, he’s done it,” she said to Regina. “If you 
touch that ham you’ll get an awful shock. But I think 
I can manage it, if you wish.” 

She picked up a hatchet from the tools on the floor 
and advanced upon the wires. The boy met her with 
his knife and fork, speared the lace veil with the fork 
and swept it from her head, making signs of carving 
her person like the ham. Wistaria retreated and Re- 
gina laughed. 


A Queer Family 


II 


'Teave the ham where it is/' said she. '‘I’ll attend 
to Beau later. What is wrong with Mamma? Why 
is dinner not ready?” 

The children looked at the sleeping figure on the 
lounge and said nothing. Regina understood. Poor, 
dear mother! After an attack of epilepsy she had to 
sleep an hour or two. 

"Lock the door,” said Regina, "so that no one can 
get in, and I’ll see what can be done for a dinner.” 

She laid aside her clothes and went to work. 
Everything was ready when Mamma woke up. As a 
token of repentance Beau removed the electric wires 
from the ham and made some sandwiches. At sight 
of Regina Mamma gave a scream, and began to weep 
loudly. The children paid no attention, they were so 
used to scenes of all kinds. 

"Do come and eat,” said Beau, munching on a 
sandwich. "Mrs. Letty’s picnic ham is the best ever.” 

Regina consoled her mother and sat her into the 
table kindly, as if nothing were the matter. Wistaria 
found a beetle in her sandwich and screamed. Beau 
gave her another, put the beetle in its proper box, and 
ate the sandwich himself. 

"Next to beetle sandwich I like grasshopper pan- 
cakes,” he said. 

"And what kind is that?” they all said. 

"I learned it camping,” Beau answered. "One 
morning I was cook, and I made pancake batter in a 
tin pail. It was the last of our pancake flour. I laid 
the batter near the fire while I got the pan ready. 
When I picked it up there were six grasshoppers try- 
ing to swim in the stuff. They were all mired. I said 
nothing to the fellows, but just divided up the stuff 
so that there would be one whole hopper to each pan- 
cake. The fellows liked them fine.” 

"Well, the French eat snails,” said Wistaria, "so 
I suppose the Americans may eat grasshoppers.” 


12 


The Boy Who Came Bach 


They chattered happily, for they were young and 
simple. It was only within a few months that Regina 
had begun to suspect how sad was the condition of the 
Lawton family, and how queer they must look to 
other people. They had many good friends, who 
never criticized them, but always helped. She looked 
at her family on this occasion with a kind of wonder, 
as if she had seen them for the first time. Mamma 
looked rather slipshod, with her hair down on the left 
side, and her tired and slouching attitude. She had 
been a pretty woman once, with grace of manner, 
but the washing industry, which was all the Ferry 
seemed to have for poor women, and her illness had 
taken all comeliness and energy out of her spare form. 
How she could do five washings a week and survive 
was a puzzle to Regina. Mothers seemed able to do 
anything for their children. But such children ! Wis- 
taria in her lace curtain and flowers looked a trifle 
crazy, and had already begun to act much more so 
than she looked. She seemed like an elf, with her 
light hair and graceful poses and gestures. Beau had 
a sensible, lively appearance, a good mind, a fluent 
tongue, and great energy, but his actions were quite 
the contrary; being perverse, lazy, impudent, tricky, 
and utterly without any heart. Regina had of course 
seen all these oddities before, but had taken them as a 
part of the general condition, as she took herself and 
her surroundings. Now that she had seen families 
in which the girls did not dress crazily, nor the boys 
get into trouble, nor the mothers overwork into ill- 
ness, she began to ask herself what was wrong with 
this family, which had hardly enough to eat, nor de- 
cent clothes to wear, nor money to spend. Even their 
names were queer. Oppressed by the many strange 
things that flashed into her mind she said, 

‘‘Mother, how did you come to name me Regina?’' 

“It means a queen,” said Mrs. Lawton, “and I got 


A Queer Family 


13 


it from a book, where the heroine was poisoned by 
the adventuress. She was a sweet girl and her name 
was Regina Fortescue.’’ 

‘‘And how did you happen to name me Rocham- 
beau?'’ said Beau. 

“They were celebrating that French General Roch- 
ambeau about the time of your birth,’’ said Mamma, 
“and I got interested in him, and read a book about 
him. He seemed to be a very fine character.” 

“The name had no charm, for our Beau is the 
opposite,” said Wistaria. “And how did you come to 
name me?” 

“Wistaria is a plant,” said Beau, “a ridiculous thing 
like a weed. All sorts of bugs live in it.” 

“Then you should have been named Wistaria, for 
all sorts of bugs live with you,” Wistaria retorted, 
and then she gave a scream, as a lizard hopped on her 
plate. 

“You disgusting boy,” said Regina. 

Beau recaptured his pet and order was restored 
under threat of a call to wash dishes. 

“And how did you get Lafayette’s name?” said 
Beau. 

“He was another French general, very famous, a 
great friend of Washington, and used to dine with 
him somewhere in the Ferry,” said Mrs. Lawton, be- 
ginning to weep. “Oh, why do you bring up at this 
time that awful boy, the disgrace of the family, when 
I am so played out that I really cannot bear another 
single solitary thing on my nerves.” 

“Lemme give you a shock from the battery, Ma, 
it is very good for nerves and sich,” said Beau, acting 
like a doctor. 

Regina administered a light kick to his shin under 
the table and he fell silent. More and more he could 
see danger signals in his sister’s behavior. 

“Well, anyway we have a fine collection of names,” 


14 


The Boy Who Came Back 


said he to change the subject. ‘‘Fd like to collect on 
mine, if any of the Rochambeaus are alive. I know 
there are Lafayettes yet. Our Lafe should go to 
France on a cattle-boat and strike the family for a 
little cash. We need it very bad.’’ 

‘‘You would have more if you worked for it,” said 
Wistaria. 

“You wouldn’t if you worked a hundred years,” he 
retorted. 

“Both of you will now have a chance to work,” 
said Regina. “Help me with the dishes, and then we 
can enjoy the evening together.” 

“So sorry,” replied Beau with his usual insolence. 
“A previous engagement, and then the sandwich busi- 
ness, you know. Ask Wistaria to help. It’s girl’s 
work. I am a man.” 

He leered at the company, and Wistaria made a 
face at him. 

“I have ten more chapters of The Mysterious 
Bride,” said she. They began to prepare for these 
labors, while Regina looked at them in anger. 

“And am I to work all day to keep you lazy crea- 
tures in bread and butter, then get your dinner for 
you, and clean up, after you? Well, I can see myself 
turned into a slave for such humbugs.” 

Beau and Wistaria looked at her in surprise for a 
moment, and then began to sneer. She had always 
done the work without a murmur, had always taken 
their insolence in silence, and seemed to enjoy being 
their servant. She heaped favors on them, in fact. 
This sudden rage and rebellion they could not under- 
stand. It left them speechless for the moment, and 
a trifle alarmed, but still they began to sneer. 

“I hired you for good wages,” Beau said. “Aren’t 
you satisfied?” 

“If I have to get another maid,” Wistaria said, “I 
shall get very, very nervous.” 


A Great Surprise 


IS 

“Rochambeau,” said his mother with great determi- 
nation, putting up her hair on the left side, '^you will 
stay in to-night and help do the work. Wistaria, you 
shall get the rod if you read another chapter in that 
foolish book.’' 

Thereupon the children burst into loud laughing. 


CHAPTER II 

A GREAT SURPRISE 

W HEN they finished laughing Mamma sat back 
in despair and threw up her hands to show 
her helplessness. Wistaria made a grand tour 
of the kitchen, trailing her lace curtain behind, and 
then trailed away to the parlor and the book. Beau 
took up the work of making sandwiches. Regina, 
who had been as surprised at herself as any one, began 
cleaning the dishes. Being a capable, well-trained girl, 
she soon had the kitchen in perfect order, chatted with 
her mother the while, and gave Beau a few sharp 
looks, which made him uneasy. As a student of his 
own comfort Beau kept a sharp lookout on the people 
who ministered to his needs and luxuries. He did not 
like these sharp looks. She was thinking very deeply. 
As Beau expressed it to himself while he sliced ham, 
she was getting on to him. Mamma now did the talk- 
ing. 

‘Wou have always been the family slave, Regina,’* 
said she. “I was the same in our house, and small 
thanks did I ever get for it. Just think of that girl 
lolling over novels, and that boy with his bugs and 
snakes and machines, fed and clothed by our labor, 
my washing and your typewriting, and not raising a 
hand for themselves. I wish I had put them where 
they belong, in an institution, and left them there till 


1 6 The Boy Who Came Back 

old enough to work. What hard, selfish hearts they 
must have!’' 

While Regina comforted Mamma with soothing 
words, she herself began to think the matter out care- 
fully. Her brother and sister ate from her hand, yet 
neither gave any sign of kind feeling in return, only 
howling for more when they did not get all they 
wanted. Why should a boy or girl be less grateful 
than a dog? Beau had a clever brain for bugs and 
electricity. He had intelligence and wit. Perhaps he 
had some heart for his reptiles. He had never shown 
any feeling for her, and at this moment his mean sel- 
fishness looked meaner than ever. Wistaria had been 
her pet, getting all her heart and half of her posses- 
sions, but had given no sign except an increasing ap- 
petite. 

"‘They are getting things too easy,” said Regina 
aloud, “and that’s what is wrong with them. If they 
had to earn for themselves now ” 

“If I ever have to earn for myself,” said Beau 
crossly, “it will be in the navy.” 

“Anywhere far from here,” she answered, “and it 
must be pretty soon, because in this house there will 
be no more loafers after to-night.” 

Her queer look gave him strange feelings of alarm, 
and he was not bold enough to become impudent, but 
stole away upstairs to discuss things with Wistaria. 
Something dangerous was about to happen. Regina 
did not like her own thoughts at the moment. Her 
life had been happy always. How glad she had been 
to escape from laundry work into pleasant office work 
in a law firm, with easier labor, shorter hours, better 
pay, and a chance to dress well. Formerly she did 
not seem to mind her dear mother’s helpless ways, the 
lazy and shiftless children, and the wild brother hap- 
pily cooped up in a Home. Now these things became 


A Great Surprise 


17 


so many thorns to pierce her mind and destroy her 
comfort What a poor, cheap family, and what a 
long list of troubles! How much better if she were 
away from them. She could do for herself in the 
city, and live with beautiful people. But Regina, even 
if she had not thought much, had a loving nature. 
How could she leave her poor mother to struggle 
alone? How could she leave the selfish Wistaria and 
the lazy boy to their own devices, sure that they would 
become worse day by day? She did not know what 
to do, except that things must not continue in present 
fashion. There must be a quick change for the bet- 
ter. She sat down for a pleasant evening with her 
mother, and began to talk over these matters. 

‘'Mamma, there must be a change in this house right 
away,’’ said she. ‘T feel that these children are bound 
to grow as troublesome as Lafayette. We can’t do 
anything with them now, small as they are. What 
can we do with them when they are a few years 
older?” 

“Oh, why bring in trouble before it comes of itself, 
Regina ?” 

“I never have done so before. Mamma. I took 
everything as just right. But it flashed on me at 
supper that you and I have been doing too much 
somehow. And all we get is their impudence and 
laziness in return. Washing is not easy. I wish you 
could find something easier, you poor dear soul 1” 

“I am quite satisfied,” said Mamma rather coldly, 
for she saw the drift of Regina’s thought and re- 
sented it. 

“I guess that is the root of all our troubles,” said 
Regina gently. “Everybody is satisfied. You and I 
are satisfied to work night and day for these two 
children; they are satisfied to idle and plot mischief 
and grow up foolish and have us support them. I’m 


1 8 The Boy Who Came Back 

going to get dissatisfied from this very minute. Beau 
and Wistaria are old enough to earn their own living. 

I shall see that they do so.” 

“And bring more trouble into the house, Regina. 
It was forcing Lafayette to work that sent him to 
the Home.” 

“We must make some trouble to escape worse 
trouble,” said Regina. “If forcing the children to 
work will land them in a Home, I shall not cry over 
it.” 

Poor Mrs. Lawton immediately went into a temper. 

“I see what you are thinking of,” she said. “You 
have begun to scheme against my children. Now let 
me tell you at the very start that they shall stay in 
this house as long as I can support them by washing.” 

“Then you must choose between them and me, 
Mamma. I say that they must do their share in sup- 
porting the house, or I shall not stay in it. I am sick 
of their ways, their impudence, their mean ways. I 
am going where I can find decency and peace when 
I finish my day’s work.” 

Before determination Mrs. Lawton was the weakest 
of women, and she now began to weep and wail over 
a lovely home broken up, beautiful children scattered 
to the four winds of heaven, and a desolate mother 
crying her eyes out on the shore. Regina consoled 
her with the remark that it would not happen right 
away, and that it might not happen at all, if she had 
her own way with the children. 

“Beau will not go to school,” said she, “and no one 
can make him. Wistaria does as she likes, and only 
a good beating will change her. They will not do a 
bit of work in the house or out of it. Now here is 
my plan. You must help me in it. Beau must get a 
job in a store. Wis must take up the housework and 
help you in the washing. I shall bring it about, with 
your help. I know I can do it. If Lafayette were 


A Great Surprise 


19 


home it could not be done. He was the worst ever, 
but he is cooped, thank God!” 

Mrs. Lawton looked at her in a helpless, hopeless 
way. Was this her soft-spoken, gentle Regina, who 
did all the work and looked after everything and never 
complained ? Oh, what had happened to her ? It must 
be the ofhce in the city. They were both silent for 
a while thinking, and in that interval came a great 
surprise. When Beau stole upstairs to Wistaria full 
of apprehension, he found his sister reading the story 
of The Mysterious Bride. Her wreath, veil, and bou- 
quet lay on the floor, and she was sprawled on a 
lounge. He beckoned to her with secrecy, his finger 
on his lips, and when she came near he whispered, 

“There’s something going on in the kitchen. Re- 
gina has a plan to get rid of us two. Come on outside 
and listen at the window. We should know what she 
is planning for us. Maybe the Home.” 

Wistaria gave a scream, but grew silent and fol- 
lowed him out into the front yard. They snuggled 
close to the open window and heard every word of 
the talk about themselves up to the last remark of 
Regina. When the talk stopped they crept away and 
sat on the veranda in the dark. 

“Now you see what is going to happen to us,” said 
Beau. “I knew some change had come over Regina. 
She wants to get away to the city. Mamma will stand 
by us, and we’ll have the house to ourselves. But the 
washing is not enough to support us three. Now what 
are we going to do ?” 

Before Wistaria could give her usually silly answer 
the figure of a boy came in the gate from the street, 
on tiptoe, and stole over to the window which they 
had just left. Beau pinched his sister’s arm for silence 
and pointed. He went to the edge of the veranda 
and peered over. The stranger listened at the win- 
dow, then softly made his way to the basement door. 


20 


The Boy Who Came Back 


He was going in. Beau dragged his sister with him 
into the hall and down the stairs to the kitchen. He 
rushed in upon the two women with a whoop of joy. 

“Mother, Regina,” he cried, “you’d never guess 
who is here.” 

He threw open the door leading into the garden and 
there stood a boy, half in the light, half in the dark- 
ness, smiling yet shy, audacious yet timid, as if asking 
for a welcome. Regina went pale. It was the worst 
boy, Lafayette. The mother held out her arms to him, 
and he accepted the embrace warmly, but did not greet 
Regina. Beau stood and laughed at one side. 


CHAPTER III 

THE WORST BOY 

I T was sickening to Regina to look at him, although 
he was the handsomest of the Lawton family, well 
set up, active, and graceful, boyish and bold, and 
ready with his tongue. At the very moment when her 
plans for betterment seemed able to work, this marplot 
had to appear. He looked at her cheerfully. 

“What brought you here ?” she said harshly. 

“My legs,” he replied and Beau roared. “I ran 
away from the Home, and I’m not going back. Can 
I stay here to-night and get a bite to eat? I walked 
all the way from Tarry town. I’m half starved. 
You’re the boss, I suppose?” 

“Yes, I am the boss, and so you and I cannot stay 
in the same house. You ran away from the Home, 
and you must run back to it. You may stay here to- 
night and have supper and breakfast. After that you 
must go.” 

All stared at her during this speech. Never before 
had they heard that tone of authority from her or 


The Worst Boy 


21 


any other in that house. And Regina was surprised 
at herself. She had the feeling of ownership and 
direction, but she looked for a burst of wild rage from 
Lafayette, who never submitted to a superior without 
violent protest. She began to tremble at what might 
happen, but the lad thanked her and sat into the table, 
with a superb gesture to Beau as to a waiter. 

“Garcon,’’ said he, ‘‘a steak and all the fixings.” 
Then he began to sing to his mother an old popular 
song. 


Come after breakfast, bring along your lunch, 

And leave before supper-time. 

If you do that you may be sure 
That I will treat you fine. 

Any one is welcome to my house 
Whether it rain or shine, 

If they come after breakfast, bring their own lunch. 

And leave before supper-time. 

The three children sang it again in chorus, and then 
brother and sister began to wait on him, piling his 
plate with good things. Even Mamma laughed. Re- 
gina did not join in the merriment. Although she 
wished to love this wild boy, she detested him too 
much even to pity him. He was part of the family 
disgrace. A year younger than she, it had been her 
lot to take charge of him; but she had quite broken 
her heart and her patience, running away from school, 
fighting the truant officer, setting the school in an 
uproar, fighting daily in the streets, and mostly vic- 
torious. He had a knack of picking up money in odd 
places, by doing errands and odd jobs. He had wit, 
but no brains, intelligence, but no stability. He did 
only the things he liked, and could not be relied upon. 
She decided that he must leave in the morning, and 
that the proper officers should be informed of his 
whereabouts. Having thus stiffened her resolution 
she began to study him, and found that he was watch- 


22 


The Boy Who Came Back 


ing her closely. Some kind of a change had come 
over him, and for the better too. He was brimming 
over with the joy of getting home, but his manner 
showed restraint. He talked with the children and 
Mamma, but she could see that he was really chat- 
ting for her benefit. His pleasant face had a nose 
with a humorous turn to it, his voice was slightly 
hoarse, his forehead was too low, but his laugh would 
make a stone image laugh. There was a shyness about 
him all the time, in spite of his impudent air. Even 
sleepy Mamma, who always cherished him, noticed a 
change and said, 

'‘Lafayette, I believe the Home has done you good.” 

“Why so, Mamma?” 

“I don't quite know, but you are different in some 
way.” 

“Well, if I am better,” said he watching Regina 
carefully, “it's not due to the Home, but to Sister 
Fidelis. There was a lovely, good, kind Sister. She 
made up for the banging I got every other place.” 

“So you got banged, hey?” Beau said laughing. 
“How I would like to see you getting it good and hard 
every day. Did they hang you up by the thumbs? 
Did they strap you? Did they put you on bread and 
water in a dark cell?” There was no mistaking the 
jubilation in Beau's tone. He would have liked to 
see that punishment on the brother who had punished 
him so often. 

“Little brother,” said Lafayette, “I'm glad to see 
you sitting in front of me gobbling up the news, but 
before we continue this love-feast I must teach you a 
few things. I have been to college, and am now home 
on my vacation. I was not in a reformatory or a 
prison. When you speak of this matter again, here 
or anywhere, just keep your bright little mind fixed 
on the idea of college, and talk that way. Do you 
understand ?” 


The Worst Boy 23 

‘‘Straight as a die/’ and Beau roared again with 
laughing. 

“Do you still chase bugs and butterflies? Got any 
bugs on your little insides? It’s the worst place to 
have ’em.” 

“I have them inside and outside,” Beau answered. 
“Just now I’m full of electricity. If you stay home, 
Lafe, let’s start an electric repair shop. You can do 
the work, and I can do the collecting and the invent- 
ing.” 

“Young man,” said the other with great dignity, 
“it would be most unbecoming for the younger to 
boss the older. Besides one boss in the house is 
enough.” 

He gave Regina a humorous look. She had re- 
sumed her knitting and did not seem interested, but 
she accepted his challenge. 

“You are quite right,” said she, in the icy tone which 
had chilled and frightened the children all evening. 
They listened and looked with eyes and ears standing 
up and stuck out like scared rabbits. 

“The trouble with this house,” she continued, “has 
been that it had no boss at all. Mamma never cared 
to make you children do anything. She slaved for 
us all, and then fell down with fatigue. So every one 
was his own boss. Now all this has been changed 
to-night. You all know where to get your orders. 
From this time on I am the boss, and Mamma will not 
do any more slaving.” 

Beau sneered. Wistaria wanted to but failed, but 
the worst boy patted his mother’s hand lovingly and 
said, 

“Poor mother! Washing every day to keep us in 
bread and butter! How often I thought of that in 
the Home, when I was sweating and grumbling in 
the hot laundry.” 

“So you had to work hard in the dirty laundry?” 


24 


The Boy Who Came Back 


cried Beau. '‘Oh, tell us about it. Til bet you had 
to work in the dirty stables too.” 

A look settled Beau and Lafe went on. 

“And you never said a word against us boys for 
all our meanness. In the Home if you failed in just 
one thing you got walloped. There was a walloping 
ready for you at every corner. Mother, let me stay 
at home with you, and Til get a job at a dollar a day 
and give you every cent and you won't have to work 
any more.” 

The children gasped and looked at Regina. This 
appeal to Mamma meant defiance to her, but Regina 
thought it one of many tricks that would be played 
by this clever worst boy between now and his exit 
in the morning. However, there was something in 
the lad's voice which pleased her. 

‘T can see you working,” Beau said sneering as 
usual, “and besides who would be fool enough to give 
you a dollar a day?” 

“Oh, I've learned a lot,” Lafe answered. “What's 
more, I'll make you work too, dear brother. What 
have you done since you were born but live on your 
parents and friends? You couldn't earn enough to 
feed one of your own grasshoppers. Wait till I begin 
to teach you.” 

“It is no use talking this way,” said Regina. 
“Things in this house must go as I say. You must 
leave in the morning, the children must go to school, 
and the police will come here to see that all obey.” 

Every one sat and stared. This quiet sister spoke 
like a general, who knew that he would be obeyed. 
Mrs. Lawton was stupefied, for Regina had never be- 
fore interfered with the natural course of disorder in 
that household. The worst boy seemed abashed for 
a moment, but he spoke up with courage politely. 

“Whatever the boss says goes anywhere,” said he. 
“But let me make a proposition. Give me a chance. 


The Worst Boy 


25 


Give me one day to prove Fm different from when I 
went to college. Let me and the kids do the washing 
to-morrow, so that Mamma can have one day for a 
rest. I can wash and cook and iron and darn socks 
and I like to — sometimes. Just one chance, Sister.’' 
Regina looked at his anxious and earnest face and 
was tempted for an instant to accept. What a joy in 
that mean house to have a manly boy directing its 
unruly tenants! For an instant her brother had the 
appearance of a young man. 

“Catch us washing,” said Wistaria with lofty dis- 
dain. 

“I have a previous engagement at the bank,” said 
Beau. 

“You see what they are,” said Regina. 

“Just what I was,” he answered, “only meaner. But 
give me one day. Miss Boss, if I may call you so, and 
I’ll make them work as they never did before.” 

“If you can make them do anything but what they 
want to do, you may stay,” said Regina. “If I could 
afford it I would stay home to see how you do it.” 

“Easiest thing in the world. They are just dolls, 
nothing inside ’em but sawdust, and by ten a.m. to- 
morrow I’ll have ’em eating out of my hand like pup- 
pies.” 

“So we’re going to have two bosses instead of 
none,” Beau remarked with his usual snicker. “I pre- 
fer Mamma to you two.” 

Lafayette suddenly pulled Beau’s chair from under 
so that ne sat down with violence, and no one moved 
or spoke or offered to help him. 

“You must always speak respectful to ladies, par- 
ticularly young ladies,” Lafe remarked in a casual 
way, while Beau, scowling, picked himself up. “And 
now, children, kiss everybody good-night, because it’s 
time for bed, and the goblins ’ll get you if you donT 
watch out,” 


26 


The Boy Who Came Back 


With awe the two gathered up their belongings and 
walked upstairs. There was no good-night kiss, but 
there was deep respect for this fearsome brother who 
had come back at the wrong moment. Regina went 
on with her knitting placidly, like one who expects 
nothing and is surprised at nothing. She had made 
up her mind. Mamma sat silent and confused. 

“I think. Mamma, you will have to do vour own 
washing to-morrow.” 

'‘Do you want to bet on it?” said Lafe. “Those 
kids are spoiled, but I threw a real scare into them. 
We have lots of their kind in the college. You should 
see the Sisters change ’em in a month to real, live, use- 
ful human beings. What Beau and Wistaria need is 
the big stick and the ungloved hand applied evenly 
and firmly over their surfaces. I know how to do it. 
Beau has all the marks of a ho-Beau. How is that 
for a joke. Miss Lawton? I wish you could stay and 
see the fun to-morrow. That washing will be done 
in the tears of Wis. Beau will do the wringing. He’s 
a ringer anyway.” Mamma laughed heartily at his 
talk. He patted her hands, swollen and distorted with 
years of hard work, and tears came into his eyes. 

“Say, Miss Lawton, I wish you’d think that ordef 
of yours over, and see your way to let me stay a 
month, ni go to work and make some money. I’ll 
put Beau to work and keep him there. If we three 
can make enough money to keep the house. Mamma 
will get a rest. She needs it, poor thing.” 

Regina looked at him with distrust. Was he just 
a good actor for the moment? Oh, to have a brother 
really good and helpful and manly, upon whose 
strength and fidelity one could rely and rest. This 
boy’s history was against him, although he had never 
been mean and spiteful like Beau. He looked at her 
so humbly, he petted his mother so lovingly, he seemed 


The Washing 27 

so honest and candid and true that she relented, but 
shook her head. 

“The dog with the bad name has no show except 
from his mother,” said he humbly. “I mixed my own 
medicine and I must take it.” 

He made a wry face and then began to entertain 
them with stories of his “college” days. 

CHAPTER IV 

THE WASHING 

O NE thing was certain about this wild boy — ^he 
had a merry wit and a fetching humor. Re- 
gina made up her mind that he was acting a 
part just to coax her into letting him stay, but she 
saw too that a change of some sort had come over 
him. She heard an argument between him and Beau 
after all had gone to their sleeping-rooms. 

“See here, kid,” said he, “where were you brought 
up, that you throw your clothes all over this gorgeous 
apartment? D’ye think they’re an ornament to the 
place? Just get busy and hang them up on a nail.” 
Beau obeyed with grumbling. 

“You need a good dose of the Home,” Lafayette 
went on. “If you dropped your clothes on the floor 
there like an Injun, you’d be kept sawing wood till 
you learned how to respect what you wear.” 

After a long pause he cried out, “Well, saints and 
angels defend us ! Do you fall into bed like that with- 
out saying a single prayer? You’re a reg’lar pagan. 
Turn out again and down on your knees. I wouldn’t 
sleep in the same house with a man that didn’t say his 
prayers.” 

Beau obeyed again. 

“This house has gone entirely to the bad since I left 


28 


The Boy Who Came Back 


it,” the elder boy said. “I’ll bet you don’t know a 
word of your catechism. What! You haven’t made 
your first confession yet? And you fourteen years 
old? Well, of all the dubs ” 

Astonishment left him speechless, and Regina went 
to sleep wondering if the impossible had really hap- 
pened. She was called at six by her brother very 
softly, so as not to wake her mother. The smell of 
coffee came up from the kitchen pleasantly. She sat 
down to a pretty breakfast on a clean cloth, dainty 
toast, a spicy chop and clear odorous coffee. Lafa- 
yette pranced about smiling, imitating the waiters in 
luxurious restaurants. 

“Sorry the proprietor had no time to make out the 
bill of fare this morning,” he said. “But he had to 
count his money and it took him all night. He’s at 
it yet.” 

“I’m wondering how you will get along today,” said 
she. 

“How are you getting along with the breakfast. 
Miss Lawton?” 

“Fine, Lafayette.” 

“That’s the way I’ll get along today. May I call 
you Regina?” 

“Not yet. You’re on trial. I can’t believe in your 
change for the better until I see that it stands all kinds 
of hot and cold.” 

When she got up to go he began to look all over the 
table and under it for something. 

“Have you lost anything?” 

“The usual tip, I believe,” said he, extending his 
palm. She laughed and put on her coat, while he 
stood watching her with plain admiration. She was 
his sister, but he had never dreamed of Regina being 
so pretty and sweet. Her gentle face, delicate com- 
plexion, and tender eyes were set off by a neat cos- 
tume and fetching hat. 


The Washing 


29 


‘^Gee, but she^s a peach he said to himself. "‘How 
could such trash as Beau and I belong to her? No 
wonder she looks down on us.'^ 

Regina saw his admiration, and the look of broth- 
erly love behind it, and longed to kiss him, but she 
checked herself in time. He was on trial, and his past 
record chilled her feelings at once. 

“I hope you’ll be here when I come back, young 
man,” said she. 

''What would you like for dinner. Miss Lawton?” 

"Chicken fricassee, if you please.” 

"You’ll get it, if I steal the last chicken in the 
town.” 

She ran off to catch her train below the hundred 
steps, and he watched her out of sight. 

"It was a good slam all right,” he commented, think- 
ing of her hint about his absence in the evening. 
"Lafayette, old man, think of your great ancestor, 
the friend of Washington, and do your best to win 
out. My, but she is a peach of a sister.” 

He called his mother at seven. When she descended 
to the kitchen her hair still hung over her left face, 
and her hands trembled. Lafayette sat her in the 
rickety rocking-chair, combed her hair in what he 
called the latest style, put a vivid geranium just over 
her ear and another on her breast, kissed her twice, 
and said she was the best-looking woman in town. 

"Now, remember,” said he, "you are to play lady 
to-day. We’ll be your servants. Wistaria must play 
lady’s maid. Beau and I’ll be butlers and acrobats.” 

Mother had a neat and tasty breakfast of poached 
egg on toast and coffee. 

"I never tasted anything better,” she said. 

"How did Regina come to get so good-looking. 
Mamma ?” asked he. 

"They say she looks like me, Lafayette, that is, like 
me when I was young.” 


30 


The Boy Who Came Back 


hope beauty runs in the blood, as they say worse 
things do, Mamma. Why haven’t the rest of us a 
few good looks?” 

“Why, you’re not so bad, child. You will all change 
for the better besides. Beau is rather plain, but he’s 
a clever child. Wistaria is going to be handsome.” 

He cleared the table, and began preparations for the 
washing. He worked swiftly and well. In ten min- 
utes the breakfast dishes were cleaned and laid away, 
the boiler was on the stove, and everything was ready 
for the washing. Then he began to shout at the sleep- 
ers upstairs. 

“Little sister and little brother, you have just ten 
minutes to show up and tackle the Chinese problem.” 

He shouted this three times, hammering with a stick 
on the stairs. 

“I’ll have to fit up the house with electric bells,” said 
he, “to wake up these ’ristocrats. Perhaps the hose- 
pipe would do the work better.” 

After some hesitation upstairs there were sounds of 
dressing from both rooms, and before the ten minutes 
had passed Wistaria and Beau came down with rather 
distant manners. They greeted no one, but looked for 
the breakfast table, for the coffee pot on the stove, 
for the bread and butter and sugar so dear to them. 
Not only had these things vanished from view, but 
all Beau’s machinery, boxes, bottles and bugs, all Wis- 
taria’s novels, dolls, and toys, even the lace curtain 
remnant, had gone with them. 

“Come, get to work,” said Lafayette, in his rough- 
est tone, “and don’t be slow about it. This wash has 
to be over by noon, the clothes dried at four, and the 
ironing over before Regina gets home.” 

“Oh, must it ?” Beau answered in his most impudent 
way. “And how about our breakfast ?” 

“Yes,” echoed Wistaria. “How about our break- 
fast?” 


The Washing 


31 


‘We had ours, because we were up in time,’^ La- 
fayette replied. “You were not up in time, so you’ll 
have to wait to get your breakfast at dinner. And so 
much is saved to this poor but interesting family.” 

“Mamma,” the two began, but their brother made 
a dive at them, and they fled in terror upstairs. 

“I’ll give you five minutes to come back and begin 
work,” he shouted at them, “and then I’ll take the 
strap to you.” 

They did not reply and for some time no sound was 
heard from them. 

“They have run away,” said the mother, “so I must 
help you, child.” 

‘They can’t run away, so they haven’t,” replied 
the boy with a grin. “Our flat is locked, nailed, and 
barred. Keep mum, lady, and see the fun.” 

The rebels tested every outlet, then gave up in de- 
spair. They might have stayed in the parlor, locked 
the door and kept their boss outside, but their play- 
things and books were in the boss’ hands, and the 
parlor offered no joy. 

“Anyway he’d break down the door,” said Beau. 
“He’s a terrible pirate, Wis. I say, let’s go and make 
terms with him.” 

Lafe was shouting from the kitchen that their time 
was up, his patience was gone, and the strap was itch- 
ing for blood. They came in silence and glared at him. 

“Now, sonny, don’t you talk to me the way you 
look,” said he. “I’m the boss for to-day, and your 
mother’s the queen. You and Wis are going to work 
like mules, with nothing on your little stomachs, until 
you have earned it. You’re going to begin earning 
your living. Now, if you want to begin with a wal- 
loping, I’m ready to write my name with this strap 
on every inch of your lazy little hides. If you want 
to start straight, you can have coffee and dry bread at 
eleven o’clock, but not before.” 


32 The Boy Who Came Back 

‘Where’s my boxes and bottles?” Beau shouted at 
him. 

“And where’s my dolls and books?” snapped Wis- 
taria. 

“I’ve taken your personal property and real estate,” 
said he. “You’ll never see them again till I say so. 
And, as the Mysterious Bride says, I may never utter 
the fatal word. Are you two going to knuckle down 
to work?” And he banged the table with the strap 
in his hand. 

“You’re nothing but a big bully,” Beau snarled at 
him. “You’ve got the upper hand now, but wait till 
I get my innings.” 

“I’m waiting, sonny, and waiting too long. Are 
you going to work at this wash, or am I going to tan 
your lazy hide?” 

“Oh, come, come on. Beau,” said Wis. 

They went on after that with few words. Follow- 
ing her son’s advice the mother said nothing, only sat 
there in state, and wondered if it were really true. 
She looked haggard but sweet with the geraniums 
glowing on her. Lafayette knew the routine of wash- 
ing to perfection, and directed the assistants very 
nicely. The lazy creatures had not done so much 
work in their lives before. Wistaria wept secretly, 
but he shook the strap at her when she showed signs 
of appealing to her mother. 

“Step lively, varlets!” he shouted, if they lagged a 
trifle. 

It was hot and terrible work, especially the handling 
of the wringer, which fell to Beau, and the two began 
to wonder how mother found the strength to do that 
five days every week. 

“Now you see what it means to earn your bread,” 
said their rough boss. 

“I want to see that bread soon,” Beau answered in 
his rage. 


A Coal and Wood Business 


33 


It was near one o’clock before the work was done 
to suit Lafayette. He hung out the clothes himself, 
keeping guard on the window to hinder any attempt 
to escape. Then he set himself to make coffee, to cut 
bread, and to set the table plainly. There was no 
butter, he sugared the coffee to his own taste, and 
watered the milk. 

'‘You’ve just about earned this meal,” said he, “but 
if I took out my charge for teaching you how to work, 
only water would be left. Now wait till you see the 
lunch I’ll put up for myself and the queen.” 

It was a course lunch, warmed-over soup first, then 
bacon and eggs with fried potatoes, closing with small 
cakes and fragrant tea, all served on a neat cloth. 
The two “varlets” ate their dry bread and their pale 
coffee in angry silence, while Mamma and the boss 
chatted gaily. Then the job had to be finished in the 
afternoon, and the three worked until every muscle 
ached, ironing and folding. Their tempers improved 
under weariness, and the boss permitted watery milk 
and cake at five o’clock. He told stories of the Home, 
sang songs, danced little jigs, and mimicked odd 
people, for his mother’s entertainment. And at six 
o’clock the work was done. 

CHAPTER V 

A COAL AND WOOD BUSINESS 

I T was so strange to see Mamma sitting idle all 
day long, while others worked, that Wistaria be- 
came interested in learning how she felt. 

“Why, I feel just silly,” said Mamma. “I wouldn’t 
do it another day for anything. But it has rested me. 
And I just did enjoy seeing how well Lafayette does 
things. He is a real housekeeper. And you work 
very nicely. Wistaria, and so does Beau.” 


34 


The Boy Who Came Back 

‘*But never again/^ said Beau raising his right hand. 

“But never again/' Wistaria repeated in the same 
fashion. 

“But every wash-day/' answered their big brother 
also raising his hand. 

“You can't play the same trick twice," said Beau 
with a sneer. 

“I have a new trick for a snail like you every day 
in the year, sonny. And I have the strap, also the 
institution where I was reformed. You need it ten 
times more than I did." 

“Oh, please don't quarrel, boys," said Mamma. 

“No, we shall not quarrel, mother," said Lafayette ; 
“we shall just shove this person into his proper place 
with strap oil, and if he makes another impertinent 
observation to me or any one else this beautiful sum- 
mer evening, he shall get a view of more stars than 
there are in the evening sky. Now for dinner and a 
reception to Miss Lawton." 

Even Beau had to laugh at this, while he sidled away 
from the flashing eye and ready hand of his brother. 

“You will set the table, Wis," Lafayette went on, 
“as if for the Mysterious Bride. You may amuse 
your mother. Beau, by just making faces. Now then, 
Wis." 

Mamma made a sign to Beau to say not a word, and 
Wistaria lost no time in putting on her apron. The 
big brother had seemed large enough the night before 
on his arrival, but after twenty-four hours of bossing 
he looked as large and awful as the giant in Jack and 
the Beanstalk. The manner in which Lafayette pre- 
pared the dinner made them laugh and wonder to- 
gether. He had marketed in the morning before the 
others were out of bed. 

“This is to be a swell dinner, in courses," said he. 
“Now watch me, dearies." He opened a can of soup 
and poured it into a saucepan. In one frying pan he 


A Coal and Wood Business 


35 


placed a heap of sliced raw potatoes, in a second a 
steak, in a third sliced onions. He made a sideboard 
out of a small table, and laid thereon a pie, a dish of 
fresh lettuce, and a bottle of salad sauce. He handled 
the three frying pans like a juggler, cut the pie into 
six pieces, mixed the salad sauce with the lettuce, 
heated the plates in the oven, emptied the onions over 
the steak, rescued the potatoes at the right moment, 
and in twenty minutes had his dinner ready, in the 
oven with the plates, to keep things warm. 

Wistaria was lost in admiration, and even Beau felt 
like applauding. 

''I’m going to teach this trick to you. Wistaria,” 
said the cook, "so that you can do it every night for 
your hard-working brothers and Miss Lawton. Now 
then, everybody fix up for the reception to our be- 
loved sister.” 

"What do you mean?” cried the others. 

"Why, this is the first time our dear sister, the hope 
of the family, has come home to a dinner got up by 
her eldest brother,” said he. "So we must make a 
fuss over it. Wis, put on your Mysterious Bride cos- 
tume; Beau, you put on a look of intelligence. But 
don’t look in the glass till afterwards, or you’ll drop 
dead with surprise. Clean off your glasses at least, 
or throw them out the window. Anything for a 
change.” 

They laughed so much that his orders were obeyed, 
and when Regina entered, full of apprehensions, scared 
at all that might have happened that day, here were 
three bright children standing opposite the door as 
neat as wax. Mamma in her chair looking happy and 
rested, the table set perfectly, and the odor of sweet 
food in the air. 

"Welcome, Miss Lawton, to our humble home,” 
said Lafayette, mimicking the delicate voice and minc- 
ing manner of a school-girl making an address. "You 


36 


The Boy Who Came Back 


see before you all that is left of the ancient Lawton 
tribe, a ham, a cabbage and a mysterious bride, also 
taking in a lady who has seen better days, and shall 
see better days, if she can stand the children/' 

He waved his hand towards Mamma and bowed 
very low. 

‘‘We wish to express to you, not by Adams' or 
Wells-Fargo, but by word of mouth, no charges, our 
very great pleasure in being supported by you; also 
the hope that Mamma's arm will never grow weak 
while the laundry business lasts. The washing has 
been done and the dinner is ready. Welcome, thrice 
welcome, to what belongs to you, and which we are 
willing to share with you. No thanks." 

Regina made a suitable reply, seeing at a glance how 
thoroughly this odd boy had carried out his program. 
She had to hear all about it while the dinner was 
served, as Lafayette said, in a style “befitting the last 
of the Lawtons." He served the courses himself, de- 
scribed the prowess of his brother and sister at the 
washtub all day, and announced their deep interest in 
self-improvement. They were both going to school 
the next morning, and would help with the next wash 
in the afternoon. Regina watched him closely. It was 
all too good to be true. To have a brother all the 
time like this, helpful, amusing, manly, affectionate, 
would be truly a gift straight from Heaven ! But all 
her experience, all his history was against it, and she 
would not entertain the dream for an instant. But 
they had a merry dinner. The children washed the 
dishes without protest or grumbling and were then 
permitted to take the air for an hour. Lafayette 
faced his sister in his frank way and said, 

“Well, what do you think of it. Miss Lawton?" 

“I think it's fine," she replied a little coldly. 

“Is it fine enough to put me on trial for a month?" 


A Coal and Wood Business 


37 


‘‘No, but Fm willing to give you the month, if you 
can persuade me that you will behave at least as de- 
cently as Beau does/' 

“I can do it, and much more." 

“But you must agree to certain things. I want to 
see them in writing." 

“What for?" 

“Oh, so that we shan’t have any disputing about 
things." 

He hunted up paper, pen and ink, put on the air of 
a professor, and waited. 

“Write," said Regina, “first, what you are willing 
to do for us here." 

“The party of the first part," he wrote, and they 
all laughed. 

“Where did you get that sentence?" 

“I used to work with a lame lawyer," said he. 

“The party of the first part agrees to help in the 
laundry, to get the three meals, to do the marketing, 
to send the children to school after washing them, 
to keep them in order, to keep the house in coal and 
wood, to go to church on Sundays and holydays of 
obligation, not to marry without permission " 

“You needn’t put that down," said Regina gravely. 

“To avoid bad company and all occasions of sin, 
and to get jobs for himself and Mr. Rochambeau 
Lawton as soon as possible ; also to turn in all wages 
to Mamma or the treasurer, except spending money, 
suitable to a young gentleman of rank." 

“Write this now," said Regina severely. “The 
party of the first part also agrees, if his conduct be- 
comes disagreeable to the party of the second part, at 
the end of the month, to leave the house and the town 
forever." 

He looked at her a moment sadly, and then wrote 
it down. He also added • 


38 


The Boy Who Came Back 


“And in that case the party of the second part will 
give the party of the first part the sum of ten dollars 
as wages and a token of good will.” 

“I agree,” said Regina. “Make a copy of that, and 
we shall sign both papers.” 

The contract was witnessed by Mamma. They spent 
the evening as before, very cheerfully. The children 
came in early to hear stories of the Home. They 
went to bed quietly, and said their prayers. Break- 
fast was ready the next morning as before, with the 
same neatness and good taste. 

“You can’t help liking it,” said Lafe. 

“It’s too good to last,” said Regina, and was sorry 
the next minute, he looked so sad about it. But the 
lad was never sad for long. He had work to do that 
day outside. The two children had agreed to go to 
school, with many objections indeed and some tears, 
and he had to rouse them, help them to get into shape, 
feed them, pet them, brow-beat them, before their 
unwilling feet took the path to the school-house. 
Mamma had no wash at home that day, but went off 
to do the washing at a distant house. He brushed her 
clothes and sent her off in good spirits. Then he 
locked up the house and set forth on business. 

He had not tasted the fresh air in two days. It was 
the loveliest of days in May. The Hudson shone in 
the sun for miles and miles, from the Palisades right 
in front of him to the broad Tappan Zee and its farth- 
est rim of blue hills. He could see the dock for the 
ferry, which took stray passengers to the other side; 
and the lumber yard, where he used to play Indian, 
and go in swimming; and the very boys with whom 
he was wont to pass the lazy hours. His heart yearned 
for the sport, for the old comrades, for the fishing, 
and just an instant he hesitated; then Regina’s last 
word stung him, and he brushed aside the temptation. 
He had work to do. He carried an old sack on his 


A Coal and Wood Business 39 

back, which he filled slowly with bits of coal picked 
up along the railroad. It was hard work, dirty work, 
but he said to himself that it paid. When the bag 
was full he carried it home. Just as he turned from 
the track to the path he ran into Lanky Bissell, one 
of the old gang. They shook hands in mutual joy, 
and sat down for a chat. 

'‘When did you get back?’' said Lanky. 

“Night before last. I jumped the Home.” 

“Good thing. And what are you going to do now ?” 

“I’ve just opened a coal yard,” said Lafayette, pat- 
ting the bag of coal. “The wood yard will follow 
right now. D’ye want me to deliver at your palace?” 

“If you want to do it for a smile, yes.” 

“Nothing doing. Cash, no credit.” 

He explained his situation, how he was home only 
on good behavior, and had to satisfy his family by 
good conduct, or go back again to the institution ; how 
he had just opened a coal and wood business to help 
the family; how he must get a good job where he 
could earn steady wages; and therefore he could ex- 
tend no favors even to old chums, lend any money, 
or lose any time. 

“Cut it out, and be a man,” said Lanky. “Come 
around with the gang, and we’ll see that you’ll get 
along. There’s a fine game of crap going on in the 
lumber yard now. Come on down. The fellows ’ll 
be so glad to see you.” 

For answer the lad shouldered his sack and went 
on up the path grinning back at his friend. The other 
looked astonished and then went on his way, after 
shouting back, 

“It’s too good to last.” 

“Well, I’ve got to show them whether it is or not,” 
said Lafayette, but he felt a great sorrow in his breast 
at the lack of confidence in him. The woods were not 
far from the house, and he scoured them for loose 


40 


The Boy Who Came Back 

wood, gathering little bundles until he had enough 
for a week piled up in the cellar. By this time the 
bells were ringing noon, the school children were rac- 
ing home, and he had to prepare a lunch for himself 
and his charges. Beau and Wistaria sat at the table 
greatly awed when they found themselves alone with 
him, unprotected by the presence of Mamma and 
Regina. 

CHAPTER VI 

GOING TO CHURCH 

I N order to be sociable Wistaria asked where Mam- 
ma had gone washing. 

‘*Up to Wilson's,” said her brother. ‘‘Poor 
Mamma ! Here are her three fat, idle children eating 
her bread and meat and pie, while she works the 
laundry outfit. We ought to be working and she 
should be at home looking after the house.” 

'^Children don’t work,” said Beau with a lofty air. 
‘‘They just eat, sleep, and play, like the butterflies or 
the fishes.” 

“Don’t the fishes and the butterflies hustle for their 
own grub, and such things as they need?” said La- 
fayette. “Do you see any big brothers handing them 
out ready-made lunches at noon sharp ? Did you ever 
notice that their mothers took in washing to keep them 
in a home and clothes and pie?” 

Wistaria took a fit of laughing at these questions, 
and the boys had to laugh too. Beau admitted that 
the butterflies had to do their own work and keep 
themselves in food and shelter. 

“They look after their own eggs too, or there would 
be no butterflies next season,” he said. “But we are 
only moths now, and the parents must look after us, 


Going to Church 41 

or there would be no men and women for the next 
generation/' 

“Pretty men and women you will make,” his brother 
answered with scorn. “You’ll have to improve a lot.” 

“Well, I’ve done well so far. No one has had to 
send me to an institution to make me worth while.” 

“You needed it bad enough, and you’re going to get 
it next Sunday. You two are going to Mass in the 
morning and to catechism in the afternoon.” 

“My, isn’t he getting pious?” Beau said to Wistaria. 

Wistaria gave her brother a look of warning. 
Something in Lafayette’s eye shone threatening. 

“The idea of two children over ten never going to 
Mass, or confession, or communion,” said the elder 
brother with menace in his tone. “I suppose you don’t 
even know the name of the priest here.” 

The two children laughed together. 

“Regina gave our names in often and often,” said 
Wistaria, “and the priest came and scolded Mamma, 
and she promised to send us, and we would not go, 
and that was all that happened.” 

“Ashamed of your ignorance and badness?” asked 
Lafayette. 

“No, we like them. It’s fine to be ignorant and to 
be bad. Didn’t you find it so yourself?” and Beau 
sneered at his brother. 

“Yes, I found it fine, but I’ve changed my mind, 
and you’ve got to change yours. I’m head of this 
family now, and so I warn you both to get your 
clothes ready for Sunday. If you can scare up a look 
of intelligence for that face of yours. Beau, it will 
help your teacher to enjoy life.” 

No further objection was made to the order, but 
the children had made up their minds to steal away 
early Sunday morning and thus escape their religious 
duties. The elder brother read that resolve in their 
cunning faces, and had his plans to trick them. He 


42 


The Boy Who Came Back 


had to study a little also the question of providing 
himself with clothes fit for attending church. He had 
only the suit from the Home, which fitted him badly, 
his shoes were run down somewhat, and he had 
neither collar nor tie. Getting anything new was im- 
possible. He had to make the best of what he had 
and what he might borrow from his neighbors. Sat- 
urday afternoon he spent in cleaning and pressing his 
own clothes and Beau’s. The latter was astonished 
at his clever use of the hot iron. The old suit looked 
for a day like new. He fixed up his shoes with polish 
and fresh strings. Then he went prospecting for the 
things which were not in his possession. The old 
house had tenants on the two upper floors, and among 
them was a boy of Lafayette’s size. For the first few 
days he kept away from that boy, which was easy, 
because the boy kept away from him. Charlie Haven 
did not associate with people like the Lawtons, and 
kept clear of rough characters like Lafayette. But no 
one in the house knew that the boy had arrived home 
from the institution, and he himself had kept in the 
background. Saturday he waited for the steps of 
Charlie Haven on the stair, and then put himself in 
his way in the corridor, just by accident as it were. 

'‘Hello, Happy, you home again!” exclaimed 
Charlie astonished. 

“Home again, from a foreign shore,” said Lafa- 
yette, but they did not shake hands. Charlie was a 
boy of slender build, good looking, with nice man- 
ners, yellow hair and blue eyes. He had also a 
sharp tongue, which often wounded others and got 
him into trouble. Above all things he avoided the 
company of boys like Lafayette Lawton. On the 
other hand Lafayette did not like him, and sometimes 
looked up to him, sometimes looked down on him. 
Just now he had made up his mind to get a few favors 
from Charlie, so he looked up to him. 


Going to Church 


43 


‘‘IVe got to go to church to-morrow, Charlie,'* 
said he, “but I came home so sudden from the Home 
that I forgot to check my Saratoga trunk properly, 
and it has gone astray. Have you any collars and ties 
that would fit me, till my trunk arrives?" 

“I think so," said Charlie. “Come upstairs and take 
a look at them." 

Charlie’s wardrobe was none too plentiful, but it 
was like a nobleman’s compared with Lafayette’s. 
The borrower carried away two collars, two ties, cuff 
buttons, an old brass pin with a red stone, and a frisky 
soft hat. 

“You can have them back Monday," said Lafayette. 
“The only way I can pay you back is to send around 
my auto some day and give you a ride. Do you think 
you can use it ? Say, would you mind introducing me 
to the priest here, Charlie?" 

“Your sister Regina can do that better than 1. She 
teaches in the Sunday School, and he thinks a great 
deal of her." 

“Oh, thank you ever so much for the information." 

There was no love lost between them, and Lafayette 
saw that he could not remove himself any too soon 
from the Haven apartment. 

“Nice boy," he said to himself, “but he eats too 
much cake, sponge cake and angel cake at that. No 
sand in him." 

Regina watched her brother’s preparations for Sun^ 
day in silence. Alone of the household she attended 
church, and her utmost persuasion had never won the 
others to perform any religious duty. Lafayette 
simply gave out orders, like a magician, and the im- 
possible happened. In some way he had found a few 
trinkets for Wistaria, and so praised her lovely ap- 
pearance that the damsel consented to go to church, if 
for no more than to show her good looks. He had 
fitted out Beau with a tie and a collar and a pin. 


44 


The Boy Who Came Back 

pressed his clothes, mended his stockings and polished 
his shoes, so that the boy was delighted at his own 
appearance. He had gathered his mother’s old finery 
and cleaned it until it looked like new. After dinner 
Saturday night the going to church had become an 
event like Decoration Day, and it was agreed that they 
should all go together to High Mass, in order to make 
a wide impression. 

“Now that the Duke has come home to his family, 
after being lost in the wilds of Pocantico,” Lafayette 
said, “it’s only fair to let the world know about it. 
Mamma and I will walk first, then Beau and Regina, 
and Wistaria can walk ahead or behind and keep the 
flies off.” 

Regina knew that the Ferry would take it as a sign 
of the end of the world, this solemn procession along 
the back street, up the hill to Cedar Street, and thence 
to the pretty stone church at the cross-roads. How 
long could this happy condition be depended upon? 
A procession to-day, and a month hence the same ne- 
glect as before! Still she did not interfere. It was 
the boy’s doing. He had accomplished a marvel. Let 
him have the joy and the glory of his success. The 
shrewd would laugh, but the simple would admire. 
They set forth in the mellow sunshine of the morn- 
ing, and the people who stared at them thought Re- 
gina had company from the city. No one could recall 
Mrs. Lawton in her best dress and bonnet and cloak. 
The handsome, bold-eyed youth at her side, in a gay 
hat, fresh collar, colored tie and ruby pin, no one con- 
nected with the wild lad in the Home. Lafayette had 
a walk of real distinction, and he knew how to act in 
public. Regina had a face as sweet as a mother’s 
and as innocent as a lamb’s. Beau and Wistaria had 
an air of refinement. Indeed very few of the rich 
children of the Ferry owned such natural grace as 
belonged to these half outcasts. Only when they stood 


Going to Church 


45 


for a few minutes on the lawn in front of the church 
did the truth become known. Regina introduced her 
brother to her friends, and then a little crowd as- 
sembled to congratulate him and his mother. Aston- 
ishment was on every face. The boys hardly dared 
to address Lafayette by his familiar name, he looked 
so distinguished. Wonder fell on the two children, 
seeing the general welcome given to their big brother. 
He was known to every one, and every one laughed 
as they greeted him. 

'‘Gee, but we’re in the limelight all right,” he 
whispered to Regina, who did not know that the 
phrase meant “the center of the stage.” 

They went in finally, and found seats in the beau- 
tiful church. Lafayette had coached his brother and 
sister on the taking of holy water, the genuflection at 
the pew, the kneeling for the first prayers, and his 
sharp eye kept them in line. He felt so proud as he 
led them to the pew, saw them all in, and took the 
first place himself as the head of the family. 

“It is just too good to last,” he said to himself. At 
the same time he was bent on making it last. 

“It is not to be only a dream,” he said again to him- 
self. So he prayed fervently to Our Lord on the altar 
that the glory of that hour might never fade. Regina 
whispered to him that the priest saying the Mass was 
the pastor of the parish, also a very clever man, and a 
beautiful preacher. Lafayette saw a tall, heavy, sad- 
faced man, who moved about quickly and kept every- 
body around him on the alert. His dark skin and sad 
expression gave him a look of severity. The boy was 
not drawn to him until he heard him speak, in a soft, 
easy voice, which presently rose until it filled the 
church and held the audience in perfect quiet. 

“Oh, what a grand speaker,” said the lad to Regina 
when the short sermon was over. “I wish I could get 
to know him.” 


46 


The Boy Who Came Back 


‘‘You will not have any choice,” said she, “because 
he will want to know you.” Regina helped in the 
library after Mass, and the rest of the family waited 
for her, chatting with old friends on the lawn outside. 
Everybody came forward to congratulate Mamma on 
her fine family, and especially her eldest son, and 
presently Father Sherwood came out with Regina to 
do the same. He shook hands with them all, and 
patted the bushy head of Lafayette. 

“He deserves praise. Father,” said Regina, “be- 
cause he did in a few days what I was not able to do 
in years: brought these people to Mass.” 

“He is the answer to your prayers,” said Father 
Sherwood, and the tears filled the lad’s eyes at the 
beautiful compliment. “Don’t forget that, my boy. I 
shall see you again very soon.” 

They walked home full of joy, deeply impressed by 
the events of the morning. Regina looked at her 
brother in another light after that pointed remark of 
the priest. Could it be possible that this wild lad 
represented the Providence whose aid she had be- 
sought so many years in vain? 

CHAPTER VII 

GETTING WORK 

T hat Sunday was a day never to be forgotten 
by the Lawtons. All at once from outcasts they 
had become respectable people. Every one 
praised them. Mamma in her best clothes looked 
lovely, and her children did her honor by the refine- 
ment of their appearance. Regina could hardly keep 
back her tears of joy, and controlled her feelings only 
by saying, “It is too good to last.” She invited La- 
fayette to a long walk through Ardsley Park. He 
blushed a little, surprised at her kindness. She had 


Getting Work 


47 


been hard and sharp with him all along. He knew 
she had a right to be, and did not find fault; but he 
was so glad, so glad when her kind heart began to re- 
lent towards him. So they walked and talked together. 
How he admired her! Regina had a sweet, pale, 
patient face, innocent of trouble and sin, full of smiles 
and gaiety at times. She dressed well. He felt proud 
to have so lovely a sister, and he wanted her to believe 
in him, to feel certain that he would stand by her in all 
trouble. 

“Isn’t the priest just right. Miss Lawton?” said he. 

“He is a very fine man. You may call me Regina 
from now on.” 

“Thank you ever so much,” and he mimicked a 
dulcet tone. “I think you had better wait till the end 
of the month before you let me call you Regina. I 
may be fired by that time, and then you’d be sorry.” 

“Did you hear what the priest said about you?” 

“Could I help it?” he replied, “Do you think it’s 
true, Regina, that I am the answer to your prayers?” 

“It must be when Father Sherwood says it. He 
says the strangest things, and they come true after- 
wards.” 

“What did you pray for, Regina?” 

“For what we needed at home; that poor Mamma 
might improve in health; that the children might go 
to school and to church; that you might turn out bet- 
ter; that we might have a little more money; oh, I 
prayed for everything, and nothing happened. The 
night you came home I had made up my mind to leave 
home and go to the city, where things were decent. 
When you came in I thought our troubles had boiled 
over. And instead of that you have changed the 
whole family from bad to good. I said at first it was 
too good to be true. But Father Sherwood said at 
once, after a look at you, that you were the answer 
to my prayers. I feel like believing him.” 


48 


The Boy Who Came Back 

‘‘He is a great man, Regina, but I don’t like his 
ways. He looks like a hard boss. But what he said 
about me is like money. It must be fine to be a priest, 
to be saying Mass every day, and praying all the time.” 

“Do you like to pray? Do you pray?” 

“I do, and I like to,” said he. “Why shouldn’t I? 
I get almost everything I ask for.” 

“You are lucky,” replied his sister, “because I don’t. 
If you are the answer to my prayers, then it will be 
your duty to give me everything I need.” 

“Well, I’m going to try, Regina,” and he held her 
pretty hand lovingly. “I have done nothing yet, but 
wait till I get a job and make money, then you’ll see.” 

“You have done enough to pay your board for a 
year, if it only lasts. Oh, if it only lasts, if it only 
can be made to last.” 

And then without warning, as she thought of the 
past years and the present joy, she began to cry bit- 
terly, and to wring her hands in pain. Lafayette was 
horrified. He had never seen real grief in his life, 
and it gave him a shock. 

“It zvill last, Regina,” he said earnestly. “I’ll stay 
on that job until it does last. Why there’s nothing 
more to do but keep things going. You can count on 
me, and I can manage the kids with my little finger. 
Oh, don’t cry, please.” 

And then he began to cry himself in sheer fright, 
because Regina wept harder than before. At last she 
controlled herself for his sake, and began to smile. 

“Of course it will last,” said she. “But it’s so good 
to see Mamma doing well ; and it’s so good to have a 
brother like you, strong enough to keep things in order 
like a father. I never could do anything with the chil- 
dren. Since I went to the city I began to see what 
would happen to Wistaria and Beau. The city is full 
of bad children. And I began to fret and cry every 
night. It was so grand to find you able to do some- 


Getting Work 


49 


thing. Oh, you have done so much, Lafe, don’t go 
back on us, don’t fail, don’t give up, or I shall die of 
grief.” 

*Tm to get a job to-morrow,” said the boy, “and 
later I’ll get a place for Beau, and in the summer per- 
haps I can get a place for Wistaria. It will keep her 
off the streets. And we won’t let Mamma work any 
more, except in the house. So cheer up, and let us 
fight the battle together.” 

Let us then be up and doing 
With a heart for any fate; 

Still achieving, still pursuing, 

Learn to labor and to wait. 

“Where did you learn that?” asked she through 
her tears. 

“At the college, of course, where I learned every- 
thing, from punching a yap to milking a cow. We 
had a nellacnshionary teacher who made us speak 
pieces.” 

“What kind of a teacher is that?” 

“Oh, he’s a chap that shows how to talk with your 
hands and feet just as well as with your mouth. I 
know “Bingen on the Rhine” and “The Bells” and 
ten others.” 

She made him recite all he knew, and found him a 
very good reciter, with a real appreciation of verse 
and declamation. It seemed that the end of the lad’s 
little accomplishments was yet a long ways off. He 
had an endless flow of good spirits and fun, and talked 
with her as freely as if he had been back for years in- 
stead of a week. So they walked home to dinner joy- 
fully, and had the most beautiful day of their lives. 
The next morning the children went promptly to 
school. Mamma went off to work, Regina went to the 
city, and Lafayette locked up the house and set forth 
to seek work. Three members of the family working 
and two at school preparing for work ! 


50 


The Boy Who Came Back 


*‘Gee, but things are coming our way/' said the lad, 
as he turned into Main Street, and took a look at the 
stores. 

“Hello, Mickey, can’t you see a friend?” 

“Hello, Lafe, what are you doing around here?” 

“Looking for a job, of course. Can you put me on 
to anything good?” 

With a grin the boy put up both his fists in fighting 
attitude. 

“Here you are,” said he. “You’re going to get the 
right in your left eye and the left in your right eye. 
Oh, don’t look surprised. Forgot wLat you did to me 
the night before you got sent to the Home? Well, I 
don’t forget, so come on and take your welcome to 
our city right now. It’s almost cold waiting for you.” 

With a chill Lafayette remembered the trick he had 
played on Mickey. 

“But see here, Mickey,” he pleaded. “I’ve just 
come on the street, looking for a job. How will I get 
a job after fighting with you up and down the asphalt? 
Wait till to-night, and we’ll have it out on the dock 
with nobody but the fellows to see.” 

The lad shook his head. 

“Well, come down to my house ” 

But Mickey cut short all argument by a direct at- 
tack on the eyes of the pleader, and in two seconds all 
the street was admiring the spectacle of two boys 
pummelling each other with right good will. Now 
Mickey had made a mistake of tactics in taking La- 
fayette so suddenly to task. Three years had passed 
since their first difference, in which time young Law- 
ton had grown to be the stronger of the two, a good 
boxer, and a more wary fighter. It took him just two 
minutes by the clock to give Mickey a pair of dark 
eyes, a bloody nose, a loose tooth, a sick stomach, and 
a few other things which were not his an hour earlier. 


Getting Work 


51 


And in that time Mickey had not so much as touched 
his opponent. But Mickey learned quickly. In two 
minutes he learned the quality of the other, and also 
that he was a beaten boy. 

“All right,” said he, in the third minute. “I’ll fight 
this out in the lumber yard to-night. I think you can 
get a job at the drug store.” 

He slipped away to a private pump for repairs, and 
Lafayette walked up Main Street with a train of ad- 
mirers, who thought he had the best punch in that 
market. But he was ashamed of his introduction to 
business life. What would Regina say? What would 
the priest say? It was not his fault that Mickey 
remembered his wrongs, but it was his fault that he 
had caused those wrongs. Now the first thing to 
meet him in the business street was his wicked deeds 
of three years back. He remembered the priest at 
the Home telling them that the sins of men follow 
them everywhere until they are repented of. Here 
was the proof. So he did not hear the praises of 
the boys for his boxing, and he shook them off before 
he got to the drug store, with instructions for them 
to tell no one. And there coming down the street 
was Father Sherwood himself. Lafayette did not see 
him soon enough to escape, and had. to stand under 
his sharp, penetrating eye. 

“Well, what job have you?” said the priest. 

“I’m looking for it yet. Father. I only just began.” 

“How long will it take, do you think?” 

“Five minutes, if what a kid down the street tells 
me is true. They want a boy at the drug store.” 

And as luck would have it, Mickey popped out of 
an alley at that moment, right in front of them. He 
halted humbly before Father Sherwood. 

“This is the kid that told me,” said Lafayette, so 
frightened that he did not know what he said. And 


52 


The Boy Who Came Back 


the priest smiled grimly as he looked at the battered, 
red, frightened face of the other boy, and putting two 
and two together knew just what had happened. 

'‘It was kind of you to let Lafe know,’' said he, 
“but very foolish of you to get into a fight with 
strangers, Mickey. I know it was a stranger, because 
no one of your size could ornament you so prettily. 
Don’t get too bold, Mickey.” 

There was an awful pause, as the boys waited for 
the next incident. Lafe feared that Mickey would 
tell on him, and perhaps the other lad wavered a mo- 
ment. Nothing happened, and the priest asked no 
further questions. 

“Go and apply for your job,” said he, “and use my 
name as a reference.” 

“Thank you. Father.” 

“And say I sent you,”- Mickey remarked with a 
smile. 

“Thank you, Mickey.” 

The apothecary looked the boy over some time and 
asked a few questions. , 

“What’s your name?” 

“Lafayette Lawton, sir.” 

“Good name,” said he. “What wages do you ex- 
pect?” 

“Eight dollars a week to start, Sundays off, and no 
night work.” 

“Got any references?” 

“Rev. Dr. Sherwood of Sacred Heart Church.” 

“He’s all right. Doctor, if you want a boy,” said 
the priest from the door. 

“Thank you. Father. The job is yours. When can 
you go to work, boy?” 

“Right now,” said the joyful lad, and in ten minutes 
the druggist watching him began to feel as if he had 
known him ten years, and never had a real boy in his 
employ before. 


A Wicked Boy 


S3 


CHAPTER VIII 

A WICKED BOY 

F or ^ whole month the Lawtons had a beautiful 
time. Three people were working and two going 
to school. Mamma brought in ten dollars a 
week, Regina fifteen and Lafayette eight to the house- 
hold. Affairs went just like a clock, tick tick every 
second, on time to the minute, with peace and order 
in command. Really it was too good to be true, but 
for a month it showed no sign of collapsing. They 
began to talk of buying new furniture for the house, 
but first it was resolved to fit out Mamma with beau- 
tiful clothes for Sunday and to engage two seats in 
a pew for her and Regina. 

There were two spots on all this happiness, how- 
ever, and their names were Beau and Wistaria. They 
were really wicked children, that is, unruly and bent 
on having their own way ; but they were also cowards 
and very much afraid of their big brother, who ruled 
them with an iron hand. He would not tolerate one 
word of impertinence from them, and, if they did not 
perform their set tasks on the moment, found ways 
of punishment. 

“If you ran as far as California,’’ he said to Beau, 
“I would follow you, and put you in a reform school. 
Remember you are a minor, and the reform school is 
the place for minors who do not behave.” 

“You say it and you ought to know,” snapped Beau. 
“Yes, I say it and I do know, but that’s nothing to 
what you’ll know, my old college chum, if you try any 
games in this house.” 

So Beau had to keep silence and plot in the depths 
of his wicked and crooked mind, how to get free and 
to get even at the same time with this strong brother. 


54 The Boy Who Came Back 

whom he now had come to hate. He and Wistaria 
complained together and finally they planned a con- 
spiracy against Lafayette and Regina, after talking 
the whole month about it. They had the house to 
themselves some Saturdays, because the others were 
at work. Lafayette ran down from the drug store a 
few times to see that they were doing the housework 
and behaving themselves. They snarled at him like 
wolves, in spite of all he had done for them. This 
particular day at the end of May Beau shouted, 

“I have the plan which will send this bully back to 
the Home.” Wistaria was playing Rosalind that 
morning, straying in the Forest of Arden and moon- 
ing on her lost Orlando. She had a coat and hat on, 
and her skirts tucked up so as to look like a young 
man. 

“But you look like a scarecrow,” said Beau. “No 
Orlando would look at you twice, unless to fire a brick 
at you. Come here and let’s talk Lafayette.” 

“You’re no Orlando yourself,” Wistaria retorted. 

So they sat at the table and began to spin wicked- 
ness like ancient witches. 

“Lafe’s to blame for all our trouble, isn’t he?” 

“He is,” said she, “and there’s lots more of it com- 
ing our way.” 

“If my plan works, the trouble will hit him and Re- 
gina. He’ll have to go. Here’s the way the plan be- 
gins: next week you and I’ll play hookey from school.” 

“All week?” asked she in a fright. 

“All week, fraid-cat, or longer, till Lafe finds it out. 
Now are you with me or are you out of it ?” 

“But how am I going to stand Lafe when he finds 
it out?” 

“Well, trust to me,” said Beau with a lofty air. “I 
am going to deliver you.” 

“You can’t even deliver yourself,” Wistaria replied 
with a snicker. 


A Wicked Boy 


55 


‘This time I do. We play hookey the whole week, 
and we run to the woods on Sunday, and we stay out 
Sunday night, and he has to look for us.’' 

“All right. I’ll do just as you do.” 

“Now I’ll tell you something rich,” and he leaned 
over to whisper it. “He’s got to going with some of 
the old gang again who play crap down in the lumber 
yard. That’s what sent him to the Home the last 
time. Something’s going to happen. He’ll lose his 
job. I’m going to fix it so’s he’ll lose it just when 
he finds out we’re playing hookey.” 

“But won’t he get another job? And can’t he beat 
us just the same?” 

“You just listen till I get through. We play hookey, 
he finds it out, just as he loses his job, and the same 
night comes the policeman to take him back to the 
Home. I’ve told the policeman of the crap game in 
the lumber yard, and the way our dear brother is be- 
having, and how he ran away from the Home. And 
the policeman says to me, ‘He was always a bad egg, 
and a bad egg he’ll be to the end. If I catch him at 
that gambling, back he goes to the Home.’ ‘My 
mother ’ll be much obliged, and my sister too,’ says I, 
‘if he is sent back. They have no use for him.’ ‘I’ll be 
glad to oblige the ladies,’ says he. Just think of Lafe 
shouting at us when he finds out we’re playing hookey, 
and right then the policeman comes in and swings him 
off to his old Home.” 

Both took a fit of laughing at the spectacle, and 
then Wistaria began to admire Beau. 

“How did you ever think of it?” asked she. 

“But that isn’t half of it. Silly,” he answered. 
“Regina’s just as bad as Lafe, now that she works in 
the city. She’ll be boss when he goes. She says we 
shall go to the Home if we do not behave. Mamma 
used to let us do as we pleased, but she won’t. She’s 
got to go with Lafe.” 


The Boy Who Came Back 


S6 

‘Well, I like that!’' said Wistaria, who lived on 
Regina’s favor. ‘Why should she have to go? And 
what would we do without her wages?” 

“Mamma ’ll wash just the same, and we’ll have the 
house to ourselves and can do as we please. Regina 
will send Mamma money from the city, and we’ll own 
it. Don’t you see, Silly, that when Lafe goes Regina ’ll 
do just as he has showed her. We must break her up 
at the same time that we break Lafe.” 

“I suppose we must,” she agreed, sighing like Rosa- 
lind, with her head on one side. Beau smiled through 
his glasses with intense satisfaction. How hard he 
had struggled with that plan to get rid of his brother I 
He had a clever head but a bad heart. He thought 
of no one but himself. He lived a good deal by him- 
self, and no one had taught him anything, because he 
was too stubborn and foolish to listen to any one or 
anything but his, own wild thoughts. He was only 
fourteen, but the evil in his mind was as old as man 
himself. He had never said a prayer except when 
forced, had never been to confession, did not know or 
care that there was such a thing as sin, did not care 
if there was a judgment hereafter, and believed in 
nothing but himself and in badness. Now he began 
to dream of what would follow his wicked plans and 
to tell them aloud. 

“No more church after this. Wistaria, no more 
prayers, no more school, no more visitors, no more 
lectures, no more beatings. My, what a lot of things 
we have had to bear from that Lafe! But no more, 
no more. When he is safe in the Home I’m going up 
some day to see him. I’ll go in and say to the Sister, 
with my face as long as a schoolma’m’s, ‘Sister, 
there used to be a boy here named Lafayette Lawton 
who was very wild and very bad ; he made his mother 
sick, and beat his brother and sisters, and gambled, 
and did every kind of badness; then the policeman 


A Wicked Boy 


57 


took him away to this Home. Is he here yet? Is he 
as wild as ever? Is he just as bad? May I take a 
peep at him?’ And the Sister will ask who I am, 
and I’ll say, his brother that he beat so often and I’m 
afraid of him, but I love him and I forgive him and I 
would like to see him.” 

He imitated the way in which he would carry out 
this scene, and the two just screamed with laughing. 
Beau smacked his lips at thought of it, and his wicked 
eyes gleamed with joy. 

‘Then the Sister will bring me into the place, and 
I will stand looking at him while he snaps his teeth 
at me.” 

“I’ll bet he’ll jump at you right there, and bite you,” 
said Wistaria. 

“Of course he will, but I can stand near the Sister 
and run behind her if he tries it,” said Beau. “Then 
the Sister will punish him and I may be there to see 
the punishment. Because he ran away once he may 
be doing all the dirty work, such as scrubbing and 
washing dishes. And I can make faces at him and 
provoke him and get him more punishment. Oh, if 
I could only get him tied to a post like they used to 
tie the slaves in the South, and then use a whip on 
him !” 

“It seems to me you’re very bloodthirsty against 
him. Beau.” 

“Haven’t I a right to be?” he growled. 

“Oh, I wouldn’t make such a fuss over it,” said 
Wistaria. “When he is sent to the Home that will 
be enough for me, and enough for him too.” 

That would not be enough for Beau, who had a 
savage nature, although if you accused him of that he 
would be very angry. He planned against his brother 
like a savage Indian against his enemy. He had 
never heard that it was a sin to plan revenge upon 
another, and even if he had he would have planned 


58 


The Boy Who Came Back 


it just the same. He had a long talk about the best 
way to get even with Lafayette with Lanky Bissell. 
Lanky did not care much for Beau but he did for La- 
fayette. He would be very glad to have the latter in 
the gang that camped in the lumber yard, because 
Lafayette had a merry way with him, could sing and 
dance and tell stories and crack jokes, and besides 
these things he had courage and daring. Beau he re- 
garded as a mere boy with spectacles and a soft head, 
and he called him names in his own mind. But when 
Beau hinted to him that his brother was planning to 
get back to the gang, and to be the best among them, 
he thought it well to listen. 

“I want to help him,” said Beau, ‘^because he has a 
hard time of it at home. Sister Regina wants him to 
keep among the goody-goody boys and to go to church 
and to teach Sunday School like she does. She says 
she will leave home if he don’t. Then he would have 
to work, and so would L” 

‘‘Tough luck,” said Lanky. 

“So he wants to join the gang in such a way that 
she will not find out,” said Beau. “And I want to 
help him.” 

“Well, let him begin to come down to the cave,” 
said Lanky, “in a friendly way first. No one will 
tell on him. We keep things secret.” 

“I think if you encouraged him,” said Beau, “he 
would jump at the chance.” 

“I invited him often enough,” said Lanky. 

“Ah,^ but what you want to do is to take him along 
some night when there’s a special good time, and give 
him so much fun he’ll never miss it again.” 

“Did he tell you to say that?” 

“He tells me nothing,” said Beau, “except to order 
me to chop wood and run errands and polish his shoes, 
but he talks about the gang in his sleep, and I know 
what he wants.” 


Trouble Begins 


59 


^'And like a good little brother you are trying to get 
it for him/' Lanky answered with a laugh. ‘1 see. 
You want him in the gang, because you want to get 
there yourself some time. I can tell you now you will 
never get in. You have no sand." 

“If one of the family gets in that will suit me," 
said Beau, and he laughed loud, so that Lanky was 
a bit puzzled, but he promised to urge Lafayette to 
join the gang, and Beau thanked him, and went off 
hugging himself at this beginning of his schemes. 

CHAPTER IX 

TROUBLE BEGINS 

E very one talked about the Lawton family, it 
was so wonderful to see the change which had 
come over them. What happiness they enjoyed 
for a whole month! Every Sunday the people saw 
them at church, dressed so neat and looking so pros- 
perous. Many congratulated Regina on her good luck. 
She always gave the credit of it to her brother, but 
no one could believe so strange a story, that a wild 
boy should come out of a Home and reform such a 
queer family. It was Regina’s way of starting her 
wild brother on the right path. It was doubtful if he 
would hold to the right path. Once wildness shoWs 
itself in the blood, it is certain to break out again in 
some fashion. The people were partly right. The 
wildness was in Lafayette’s nature, and it had already 
begun to show itself again. He had yielded to temp- 
tation and had joined the gang again. He had taken 
part in the meetings and games of the lumber yard. 
He had played for money and lost some. But he said 
to himself that he would only go so far and then stop. 
It was so pleasant to sit in a little lumber cave, with 
a lantern hanging overhead, and ten good fellows sit- 


6o 


The Boy Who Came Back 


ting around, smoking, story-telling, and joking, play- 
ing crap, getting into disputes, getting out again; and 
then a grand lark at the close, in and out of the 
lumber piles, teasing the watchman, racing and shout- 
ing until exhausted with the fun. Charlie Haven met 
him coming out of the yard one night with the mem- 
bers of the gang. They were not the kind with which 
Charlie associated; they disliked him for his nice 
manners, so they thought to have a little fun with 
him. 

'‘How do. Miss Haven, why so far from home and 
mother?” 

“Dip him in the river, and let the salt get into his 
bones.” 

This proposition suited their humor and they laid 
violent hands on the lad, but Lafayette interfered. 

“My friend, fellows,” he said, “just take your hands 
off him. He fixed me up for my first visit to church 
with his own clothes.” 

“Then it’s off,” said the leader, and they immedi- 
ately forgot Charlie’s existence. The boy was fright- 
ened and had grown pale and nervous. Lafayette 
lingered to console him and to see him home. 

“They didn’t mean anything,” said he. 

“No, of course not, the toughs,” said Charlie bit- 
terly. “They were only going to hand me a cake and 
a plate of ice cream. What are you doing around 
with them?” 

“Why, I used to travel with them,” said the other. 
“Old friends, you know, and they asked me in.” 

“Well, take my advice and ask yourself out,” said 
Charlie hotly. “You can’t afford to go round with 
such trash after being in the Home. You’ll be sent 
back before you know it.” 

“Oh, will I? Well, you’ll have nothing to do with 
it, and it’s none of your business anyway,” said La- 
fayette in his most impolite way. 


Trouble Begins 


6i 


‘I’m only warning you for your own good,” said 
Charlie. “The other day Father Sherwood was say- 
ing that you were a great boy, and that he would like 
to do something for you. But if he sees you with that 
crowd, and hears of the lumber yard, I can see what 
will happen. Fm just telling you.” 

“Well, you’ve told me, and now I tell you to be 
careful and not go telling tales on me to Father Sher- 
wood,” said the other. 

“Fm no tattle-tale,” said Charlie, “and the priest 
knows more about this town than all of us put to- 
gether. He will find out for himself. Fm obliged to 
you for saving me from a ducking, and when you want 
anything from me come and get it. But if you can't 
take a warning without getting mad over it, excuse me 
from interfering any more.” 

They snapped at each other in this fashion all the 
way home, although each was grateful to the other 
for special favors; but also each found the way of 
the other not to his liking, and spoke frankly about it. 
When Charlie had gone and he began to think about 
his warning, Lafayette had to admit that he needed 
it. He knew it would not do for him to be seen with 
the gang. They were boys who idled too much, and 
raided orchards in summer and gardens too, and 
fought fist-battles with one another, and were some- 
times arrested for petty things and fined in open court. 
They were not boys who promised much for the fu- 
ture. On the other hand they were daring lads, good 
swimmers, good athletes, good ballplayers, generous 
with their money, and fond of good times. They 
gambled and boasted about it. Lafayette felt that he 
could not be led into such ways, for he despised them. 
At the same time he liked the company, and he knew 
that liking their acts might follow. He felt very un- 
easy to know the priest thought about him, and that 
he might hear of his bad company and forget him. 


62 


The Boy Who Came Back 


However, after long thinking he decided that for the 
present it would be no harm to visit the lumber yard 
and keep the affair a secret. He did not yet know that 
nothing can be kept secret in a little village, if one or 
two know the secret beside yourself. Even the gang 
did not keep its own secrets. Then Charlie Haven 
knew it, and warned him. The priest probably knew 
it. Lafayette put all these things aside. He felt that 
he could enjoy the gang for a while any way. That 
was a second mistake. All our acts have conse- 
quences, no matter how trifling they seem to be. A 
bit of orange peel or banana peel on a sidewalk is a 
little thing, but it upsets and often injures the man 
that steps on it unknowing. Poor Lafayette was scat- 
tering many banana peels in his own path, and Beau 
was placing others where his heels might reach them. 

Regina kept a sharp eye on Lafayette at first and 
watched him when she questioned him. But now she 
had forgotten her prudence, and did not even note his 
expression. He had begun to change. A wild look 
had come into his face. It was a sweet, manly, candid 
face, and told everything to him who watched it. 

'Ts everything all right?” Regina said as usual this 
night. 

'‘All right,” he answered with a smile. 

“Good company?” 

“Good company.” 

“Your boss likes you?” 

“He says he is satisfied.” 

“Then it isn’t too good to last.” 

“It’s going to be better,” the lad declared fervently. 

Beau snickered in their faces, and could not help 
saying, 

“It’s too good to last, and Charlie Haven knows it, 
and you know it, and Mamma knows it.” 

“Caw ! caw !” said his brother, imitating the call of 
a crow. 


Trouble Begins ' 63 

^‘Here’s a conundrum/’ said Beau, looking him in 
the eyes. '‘Where are you going to-night?” 

“Fm going to stay right here, and play with you, 
dear little brother.” 

Regina did not see the ugly look on his face for 
Beau, and the latter fled, feeling that he had said too 
much and was giving away his own game. They were 
all playing into his hands, and poor Regina was asleep. 
Only Beau and Wistaria were wide awake, helping on 
the trouble. Beau had a talk one day with his police- 
man, who was very fond of him and thought him a 
good, bright little boy. 

“Mamma is getting very anxious about our Lafe,” 
he said. 

“Has he gone into the crap game deep?” asked the 
officer. 

“I guess he is there every night. At least he goes 
down that way.” 

“Every night! Well, that’s pretty bad for poor 
boys. It’s a bad gang.” 

“They must lose a lot of money. I know the very 
place. I watched them. And they had a pile of money 
on the table one side. I don’t know who got it.” 

“You know the place? Why, you’re a regular de- 
tective. Any time we make up our mind to have a 
raid you can show us the very spot.” 

“Do you think you will have a raid soon? I know 
Mamma would be awful glad to have it broken up and 
to see my brother at the Home again.” 

“Well, I’ll talk to the Chief about it. It ought to 
be broken up. Mere lads ought not be allowed to go 
on that way. I’ll speak to the Chief and tell you when 
the raid will come off. And you be ready to lend a 
hand, detective.” 

“When do you think it will be?” the lad per- 
sisted. 

“In a few days, I imagine. Tell your mother not 


64 


The Boy Who Came Back 


to worry. We’ll send that wild buck back to his stall 
on short notice.” 

“He’s an awful bad boy,” he said. “He beats me 
something awful, and I’m not strong enough to fight 
him alone.” 

“It’s a shame,” said the policeman. 

“I’m going down there to-night and watch them 
again. I’ll put all their names on paper. Perhaps 
you could get them then.” 

“You get the names and I’ll show them to the 
Chief.” 

He had to be content with that. He and Wistaria 
were playing truant that week, and while they had 
plenty of fun did not feel too sure of themselves. La- 
fayette might discover them any moment and bring 
on a catastrophe altogether different from what Beau 
was preparing. Still he felt that he was doing very 
well. Just then he had on his list a certain Sam 
Cropsey, noted for his prowess as a fighter. Sam 
would attack an enemy in school or church or parlor 
as well as in a field. 

“My brother can lick you,” Beau said to him one 
day. 

“I can lick you and him together,” said Sam with 
scorn. 

“He is just from the Home, and he laid out Mickey 
Mason in two minutes.” 

“I can lick him and you and Mickey in a bunch,” 
said Sam. 

“I wish you would,” said Beau. “He’s the greatest 
blower I ever heard. He’s going to tackle you the 
first time he sees you. Say, give him two for me, will 
you, and I’ll treat you to a soda.” 

So they became great friends, and had many chats, 
in which Beau told Sam all the mean things his brother 
had said about his fighting abilities, and' what a fighter 
the Plome had made him, and how cheeky he had be- 


The Trouble Continues 


65 


come, till no one could stand him. Sam was very 
much wrought up by this talk, and when he encount- 
ered Lafayette in swimming one day began to make 
remarks on his elegant appearance since his return 
from college. He would like to go to the same college 
and get the same trimming: not that he needed it, but 
it was a good thing to have ; only he could not afford 
the expense, because his father was poor, and he him- 
self had no friends among the officers of the law. 
Now Lafayette held Sam in great respect as a fighter, 
and also in fear because of his prowess. He replied 
to this chaff in kind, and his ready tongue cut deep 
into the other boy. He remained at a safe distance, 
however. He wanted no fight, and he supposed Sam 
was simply in good humor. But Sam got into a rage 
and wanted to fight on the spot. Lafayette declined. 
Then said Sam, 

“Fll catch you in the drug store some day, and set- 
tle who is the better.” And Lafayette filled up with 
sadness and fear, because he was no match for such 
an antagonist. 


CHAPTER X 

THE TROUBLE CONTINUES 

T O use his own words, Lafayette was the squar- 
est boy that lived. He believed in fair dealing 
with every one, and especially with himself. 
Squareness with him meant fair dealing, that is, to be 
open and candid in all things. He had an eye for this 
quality in others, admired it very much, and sought 
for it. Therefore he began to have an uneasy con- 
science, because he knew he was not playing square 
with his sister and the family. He excused himself 
by saying that a little would not do any harm, and he 


66 


The Boy Who Came Back 


would soon stop it. He did not stop, but became 
more and more charmed with his old companions. 
They liked him, and petted him, and Lanky Bissell 
explained to them how they should treat him and trick 
him, as Beau explained, until he became attached, and 
could not break away. The plan worked very well. 
What with the good job in the drug store, and things 
going well at home, and money and praise pouring in, 
his old recklessness began to appear in his daily do- 
ings. His comrades ridiculed his piety, and urged him 
to quit church-going, at least, and to spend Sundays 
with the gang; but one look at his sister's contented 
face kept him from that blunder. He was having so 
good a time, and felt so sure of himself, that he did 
not pay the usual attention to Beau and Wistaria. 
They had very demure manners and faces for him 
when he came home, spoke softly, and obeyed 
promptly; but all the time they were playing truant 
from school under his nose. 

^T told you it was easy to fool him," Beau had 
said to his sister, ‘^if one only had courage enough. 
How mad he’ll be if he finds out. I’m going to do 
a lot of fooling for the next month.’’ 

Lafayette had only to ask the truant officer to learn 
how he was being tricked, but he was too satisfied to 
do so. Why, these mean creatures would not dare to 
deceive him so easily. He could have guessed from a 
brief study of Beau that he was doing or planning 
something wrong; but because he was shutting his 
eyes to his own trickery he was overlooking the 
trickery of others ; and because he was busy with his 
own sins, he forgot the sins of others. So the mis- 
fortunes threatening the Lawton family got a good 
start while he was asleep. His recklessness began to 
work mischief. There is a time for everything, and 
everything should take place in its own time. Work 
should not interfere with play, nor play with work. 


The Trouble Continues 


67 


One day the boss gave him a big book to carry into 
the office. On the way he saw a chap stooping under 
the counter and could not resist the temptation to 
bring the book down on his body; whereupon the 
son of the boss rose up with indignation and made 
remarks. Lafayette apologized in confusion. An 
hour later he was skylarking with a bottle of magnesia, 
which should have been placed on a shelf with care, 
when it slipped and went to smash on the floor. The 
boss looked on placidly and made some figures on a bit 
of paper. “Rather expensive work, Lafe,” said he. 

The lad moved around softly for the rest of the 
day, computing the bad marks against him. He did 
not have the courage to state the cause: that he was 
losing ground, losing his grip on himself, and falling 
back into the old, foolish, careless ways which had 
sent him to the Home. He felt his own recklessness, 
and seemed to like it — a bad sign. 

He felt inclined to run into the church that day and 
pray for help, but the appointment in the lumber cave 
was too tempting, and he had not the meanness to go 
to church first and then to a gambling place. He 
began to get sad, to get blue, he called it. One of his 
duties was the delivery of goods to customers, for 
which he traveled around on a bicycle, a poor machine, 
but serviceable. At one place he left it at the gate 
while he delivered his medicines at the house. He had 
resolved to keep out of the most innocent mischief 
for the rest of the week, but at this place lived a boy 
with whom he was constantly jesting; so he lingered 
longer than he had a right, the two lads had a scuffling 
match and a chat and then a lark ; and the delay gave 
Beau the chance for mischief. Wistaria and he were 
enjoying the fourth day of their absence from school, 
and came upon the bicycle. They hid in the bushes 
at once to escape being seen by their brother; but 
when Lafayette did not appear right away Beau di- 


68 


The Boy Who Came Back 


rected Wistaria to meet him at a spot farther on, 
jumped on the bicycle and rode out of sight. He met 
a stranger, a laborer, on the road, and offered him 
the machine for fifty cents, a bargain which was closed 
at once to their mutual satisfaction. When Lafayette 
came out of the house for his bicycle, it had vanished. 

“Here is my finish,’' said he, after looking every- 
where for an hour, as he sat down in despair. He had 
not the courage to go back at once to the store, but 
sent word by telephone of his loss. The boss saw how 
such an accident could have happened, and kindly 
ordered him to spend the morning in search of the 
machine. The boy understood the situation. It would 
not be easy to get another boy before the end of the 
week, and therefore he would hold his job until Sat- 
urday, when he would be dismissed. He sat on the 
grass in the park with his head in his hands, thinking. 
As Regina had feared, it was all too good to be true. 
He was born for bad luck. He knew that the bad luck 
of that week was due to his own folly, but he would 
not admit it. 

“What’s wrong with you?” said the voice of 
Charlie Haven. 

“None of your business,” he replied. 

The other boy sat on the wall next the road smiling 
over the good news which he had for Lafayette, for 
he had seen Beau’s transaction only ten minutes be- 
fore. He knew to whom the bicycle belonged, and 
why Lafayette was grieving. He was about to impart 
his good news, when the impertinent answer closed his 
mouth tight. He knew that the children were truants 
from school, and would have told that also for their 
pke; but he felt himself excused from any further 
interference in the affairs of the Lawton family by 
this insulting rejection from Lafayette. He could 
not help saying, however, and it was a little ungener- 
ous 


The Trouble Continues 6g 

“The trouble with you is you don’t know your own 
friends.” 

“I have none,” said Lafayette sadly. 

“How about the crap game crowd?” said impru- 
dent Charlie. 

“Now, if you want a licking, young man, you just 
linger one minute longer and keep talking that way,” 
was the reply. 

So Charlie went off whistling, and also uneasy in 
conscience, because he felt that Lafayette ought to 
know a few things that meant joy and courage to him. 
However, it was true that the lad had pushed aside 
his own good fortune. Charlie had failed in charity, 
because Lafayette had failed in politeness; so all the 
evil that was v/orking went on to its proper end. 

When Lafayette returned to the store and explained 
how the bicycle had vanished, the boss looked at him 
and said. “You are very unfortunate, Lafe.” 

There was no abuse, but the boy felt his time had 
come. He kept a cheerful face to every one, however. 
The next day, as a result of inquiry and search, the 
bicycle was returned by an indignant Italian, who ex- 
plained his share in the transaction and loudly 
mourned the loss of his fifty cents. The boss looked 
sharply at Lafayette. 

“Is this the boy who sold it to you ?” he asked. 

“No, no,” said the man. “Smalla boy, mucha 
smalla.” 

And although the boss said no more about it, La- 
fayette knew the thought in his mind : that he and the 
thief were conspirators who sold the machine to make 
money. 

The next day was Saturday, and he went about on 
tiptoe in silence, hoping against hope that something 
would happen in his favor. Never had the store been 
so quiet, or the work done so well. The boss missed 
the merry quips of his jolly clerk, but gave no sign 


70 


The Boy Who Came Back 


of friendliness. At noon he ordered Lafayette to go 
across the street and telephone a message to a cus- 
tomer. With caution, after a careful look up and 
down Main Street, the lad went about his task. He 
did not wish to encounter Sam Cropsey that day above 
all other days. Yet when he turned from the tele- 
phone there was Sam in the door grinning his delight 
in having cornered him far from the protection of the 
store. 

'‘Don't you think I’ve got you now?” said Sam. 

With that Lafayette flew at him like an Indian, and 
landed a blow that slammed him against the nearest 
telegraph post. Before he got his breath Sam received 
another in his wind which dropped him into the gutter, 
and the fight was on. For Lafayette there was no 
further hope. His doom was sealed. He had only to 
finish like a man, put up a good fight against Sam, 
and take his dismissal and his wages from the boss. 
So he fought with gusto and the determination to win. 
The street crowd gathered and passed bets on the 
winner. Sam was the stronger but not the better man. 
He had not dreamed that his opponent would take 
the lead and hold it in such style. He was confused 
but not afraid, and in a few minutes got his bearings, 
his wind, and his rage. They fought all over the street 
to the door of the drug store. Worse than the blows 
of Sam were the contemptuous remarks of observers. 

“Oh, it’s only that Lawton tough. Always fight- 
ing.” 

And he had fought only twice in a month, and each 
time in his own defence. How unjust were people to 
the poor fellow with no reputation ! So he fought the 
harder, gave Sam a cut face, a bleeding nose, a black 
eye, and kept his own face free from blemish. Yet 
Sam being the stronger man, the fight could only have 
one ending, and it came at the right moment. Sam 
prepared to crush his opponent with a body blow from 


The Trouble Continues 71 

which no boy ever recovered, but as he delivered it 
straight to the mark the boss seized his arm, shoved 
him into the street, flung Lafayette into the store, and 
read a lecture to the crowd. The honor of the hero 
was saved ! 

“All right,’' said Sam. “I’ll meet him to-morrow 
and finish the game.” 

The crowd jeered him, because his appearance 
showed defeat rather than victory, but he walked away 
like a conqueror, declaring that he could eat two Law- 
tons alive. The boss had interfered because he rather 
liked the way in which his clerk had acted. 

“What has Sam against you?” he asked. 

“Nothing except that I gave him some sass the 
other day. I don’t want to fight him. He’s too heavy 
for me, but he told me that the next time we met he’d 
go for me. I couldn’t afford to wait for him to choose 
the best place, so I took him by surprise and had him 
all but going. He had me, though, when you inter- 
fered.” 

“You are unfortunate this week,” said the boss 
mildly. 

“Don’t I know it !” exclaimed the lad, turning away 
to hide his tears. 

He was drawn to go up to the little stone church 
after work and ask the dear Lord to spare him yet 
awhile, to let him hold that job. Yet he dared not, 
knowing that he had not given up bad company. 
What use to ask a favor from One whose law he was 
breaking every day. The day passed sadly. The boss 
had made up his mind. At five o’clock he handed 
Lafayette his week’s wages and made him a little 
speech. 

“You’re a boy that I like,” he said very kindly. 
“You are a good worker, and neat, and cheerful, and 
willing. But what a knack you have of getting into 
trouble! Now a drug store is not like a meat market 


72 


The Boy Who Came Back 

or a pool-room. It is a place for ladies and gentle- 
men. I cannot afford to have fighters and mischief 
makers here. It would soon drive away my respect- 
able customers. So I must ask you to find another 
place after to-day. I will recommend you to any one, 
and give you a letter of praise. You should make a 
very good clerk when you have the fire taken out of 
your blood.'' 

'Thank you," said Lafayette, and went on his way 
with hatred in his heart for himself and all things. 
He had no courage to ask for a job elsewhere. So 
he went down to the river for a swim, to drown his 
sorrows in salt water, and to recover his lost spirits. 
He felt himself the most forlorn boy in the whole 
world. 


CHAPTER XI 

ARRESTED 

I T was a pleasant afternoon, the river shone in the 
sunlight like diamonds, the beach near the lumber 
yard was crowded with boys in swimming. For 
a moment Lafayette forgot his troubles and plunged 
in as joyous as the rest. He began to feel so good 
and so gay that his mind filled up with images of that 
free life which he had led before his misdeeds sent 
him to the Home. After all, what use in worrying 
over things beyond one’s power? What did Regina 
care for him, or for the children, or they for him? 
How much better to do just as you pleased, go and 
come as you felt like doing, and have no one to bother 
about. Suppose he did establish a little home; they 
would all get married and separate. In time Mamma 
would die. There was nothing more to life. Why 
not, then, have a good time and do nothing? Just 
as he had said this to himself trouble rose right up 


Arrested 


73 


at him in the person of Sam Cropsey, who had been 
directed by Beau where to find him. 

“What's all this talk about me?" said Sam. 

“Now see here, Cropsey," Lafe answered, “no fight- 
ing, please. IVe just lost my job on your account, 
and I want to find another. Three times Fve had to 
fight since I got back from college, and each time I 
didn’t want to. Wait till Christmas, till I make 
money. Then we can go to a quiet place, and knock 
each other to pieces without having the whole town 
talking about that lazy tough, Lafe Lawton." 

They were treading water facing each other, and 
all the boys were looking on, expecting trouble. 

“Lost your job?" Sam said with sympathy. 

“The boss said to me that I was all right, but his 
customers were not used to the spectacle of bantam 
weights on the job when they came in to buy medi- 
cine. I must look up another job." 

“I’m sorry, said Sam. “Let’s go ashore and talk 
it over. Mebbe I can help you get a place." 

This was friendly and natural and they talked it 
over. Lafayette told Sam about the invitation to join 
the gang, but Sam opposed. 

“If you don’t care to stay around the Ferry," he 
said, “better run away to New York, and get a job 
there. The gang are good fellows, but they will end 
in jail, after getting a bad reputation." 

“That’s what I have now, Sam. I’m known as a 
tough and a scrapper. I might as well be what I am 
thought to be." 

“No, no, stick to your old idea of getting a home. 
It’s a good one. You can do it. You have the grit. 
I’ll help you find a job." 

In spite of this encouragement Lafayette could not 
pluck up his old spirit and courage. He saw himself 
without a friend, except the priest, and at this mo- 
ment he did not dare to go near him. The Lawtons 


74 


The Boy Who Came Back 


had no standing in the town anyway, except Regina, 
and what he himself had done since his return had 
brought him nothing. Another job would have the 
same ending. In another town he might have a better 
chance. His conscience whispered that his duty was 
here and not in another town. He closed his ears. 
He felt he was now a common fellow, who fought in 
the streets like a rowdy, had no job, and would soon 
have a worse reputation than he had before. He felt 
that it was of little use to continue the struggle, so he 
made up his mind to stay away from home that eve- 
ning, to join the gang in the lumber cave, to have a 
good time till midnight, and then steal to his bed for 
the last night in his mother’s house. The head of the 
gang had the same thought for him, and invited him 
to a supper and a game. 

'Tt’s time,” said he, ''that you join us. You’re out 
of a job, and you have no freinds. The police ’ll be 
after you to send you back to the Home. So you 
might just as well join us and learn the secrets of the 
cave.” 

“What’s the secrets of the cave?” 

“Only full members know them, my boy. You’re 
only an honorary member. When you make up your 
mind to join, then the secrets of the cave will be 
yours.” 

One by one the members of the gang stole secretly 
into the cave. It was but an open space under a pile 
of lumber, but reached by so many turns that only 
the skillful could find their way in or out. The se- 
crets were simply four passages known only to the 
members; so that, if the police attacked the place by 
the regular passages, the members could make their 
escape easily. Lafayette had half made up his mind 
to join the gang, but at the direct proposal from the 
chief he began to think. Blue as he felt, he really had 
not given up all hope. Am.id all the fun of the supper 


Arrested 


75 


and the game he kept thinking, thinking. He saw 
his mother's sweet face, and Regina’s gentle, hopeful 
eyes fixed on him with imploring looks. He saw the 
little home which he had put in good shape. He re- 
membered his dream of rescuing Mamma from the 
washtub and placing her in charge of a lovely home. 
How could he exchange that sweet life for the wild 
life of a tramp and perhaps a thief? The gang did 
not practise thievery, but neither did they hesitate be- 
fore a pleasant crime. The hour passed on gaily. 
About nine o’clock the chief stopped the game and put 
a direct question to Lafayette. 

'‘Are you willing to join us, Lafe?” 

“Haven’t I joined you?” said he. 

“No, you are only a visitor, because we trust you. 
If you join us you will do just as we do, and we’ll 
let you into things that you don’t know now. Good 
things, too. Anyway, you can’t keep up this game. 
You can’t come here like one of us, unless you become 
one of us. So it’s up to you to say when.” 

“Come on, Lafe,” the others cried in chorus. 

The boy stood up, and they all called for a speech. 
He had not made up his mind, and he knew not what 
to say. 

“You can be the pious one of the crowd,” the chief 
said. “You can go to church, and throw the bluff that 
we’re all good boys.” 

The rest laughed, but the words of the chief put 
an idea into Lafayette’s mind. It was Father Sher- 
wood who had called him the answer to Regina’s 
prayers. That flattering sentence saved him. 

“I can’t join,” he said in his direct way. “I like the 
crowd and I like the game. But here’s the way I look 
at it. I have a mother that takes in washing for a 
living. If I join the gang she’ll have to wash for the 
rest of her days. I don’t stand for that. I have a 
little brother and sister that have to be brought up. 


76 


The Boy Who Came Back 


If I don’t help, they get no bringing up. My big 
sister has the whole family on her weak shoulders. 
What kind of a man will see a girl do double work? 
I’m not that kind of a man. I’m down and out to- 
night, I’ve lost my job, and I guess I’ve lost some 
friends too. But I’m not going to do anything but 
all kinds of work for mother and the family, as long 
as I can. You hear me.” 

They heard him with respect, but began to chaff 
him on his softness. Mothers and sisters should look 
after themselves, and little children should go to in- 
stitutions. The chief was about to make some per- 
suasive remarks when various things happened all at 
once. Lafayette saw as in a dream the face of Beau 
without its spectacles in the darkness beyond the fire. 
Then there was a crash near by as of axes working. 
He saw the members of the gang fade into the secret 
passages like ghosts, without noise or speech, and 
their places taken by four policemen, who looked at 
him with some astonishment. 

“Where are the others?” they asked. 

“I guess they got away,” said Lafayette with a 
laugh. 

“Why didn’t you get away too ?” 

“Search me, Mr. Policeman. I reckon they have 
ways of going that nobody else knows but them- 
selves.” 

The men searched among the crevices a long time, 
but found no way out other than the way by which 
they had came in. 

“Bring in that kid,” said the head man roughly. 

Lafayette was astonished to see Beau brought in 
by the collar quite unwilling. The question was pro- 
posed to him. 

“How did the gang get out?” 

But Beau could tell nothing, since he had never 
seen the secret passages used. 


Arrested 


77 


‘What are you doing here?’’ asked his brother. 

‘What are you doing here ?” was the apt and saucy 
reply. 

“He’s our little detective,” said his police friend. 

“Oh, he’s our little detective, is he?” 

Beau shrank back from the fierce light in his 
brother’s eye, and the policeman, understanding his 
fear, laid a strong hand on Lafayette’s arm. 

“You’ll have to come with us,” said he. “There’s 
a few days in jail ahead of you, and a few more years 
in the reformatory. So you’ll have plenty to think 
about.” 

“You’re pinched for good, Lafe,” snarled Beau 
laughing. 

“But I’ve done nothing,” his brother protested. 
“I’m not going to jail just for being here, am I?” 

“No, you’re going to jail just for being a good 
boy,” said Beau. “You didn’t play craps with the 
gang, and you didn’t fight with anybody, and you 
didn’t sell the bicycle to the Italian, did you? You’re 
Mamma’s dear little boy that wouldn’t steal a pin. 
That’s why you’re going to be locked up and sent 
back to the Home, and that’s where we get even, isn’t 
it, Mr. Smarty Preacher?” 

The policeman enjoyed the abuse and the sneers of 
Beau, but Lafayette was so utterly astonished at his 
brother’s depravity, at the new view of his character, 
at the new calamity brought upon himself, that he 
could hardly speak. He was arrested, doomed to 
spend a few days in prison and then to be shipped off 
in disgrace! His fate was settled forever, and 
his brother was the instrument, the traitor who had 
watched and dogged him, and finally betrayed him. 
It flashed into his mind that much of his recent 
trouble might be due to the same vicious person. He 
grew silent then on the march to the jail, listening to 
his brother’s taunts, and thinking of some way out of 


78 


The Boy Who Came Back 


the mess. He knew now that Beau would work in 
every way to injure him. The lad saw him locked 
in a cell, and taunted him with the strength of the 
bars and the long time he would be behind them. 

‘'And remember,'' said Beau, “that I did it. I 
found out the lumber cave, and I brought the police 
there. I set Sam Cropsey on you, and I fixed up the 
bicycle trick, that lost you your job. Ain’t I even 
now? You won't come back to boss our house, and 
to make slaves of us. You'll go to jail." 

He did not leave until he had heard again from the 
policeman that his brother was sure of four years in 
the reformatory, and that he would not be out of their 
hands until the doors of that institution closed on 
him. Then Beau went home to break the news to 
Regina, and to rejoice in his freedom. Lafayette had 
done some thinking meanwhile. 

“Please do me a favor,” said he to the jailer. “Get 
Charlie Haven for me, and let him come to the cell 
before this place closes for the night." 

The jailer thought a moment and then granted the 
request. In ten minutes Charlie came into the room, 
where poor Lafayette sat in his cage like a captive 
bird. 

“I'm saved," he said to himself. 


CHAPTER XII 

THE FACE AT THE WINDOW 

N ever had Regina felt happier than this fatal 
afternoon. She spent it in the city, with 
friends, and returned home about the time 
her brother joined the gang in the lumber cave. 
When she opened the door a chill fell on her. There 
was no one in the rooms. Usually the sound of prep^ 


The Face at the Window 


79 


aration came from the kitchen, where Lafayette helped 
to get the dinner. Wistaria would be playing the part 
of Ophelia in the little parlor and Beau tinkering at 
his machines elsewhere. Now a dead stillness rested 
on the house. Beau was tracking the gang. His 
sister was enjoying tea with friends, for they had 
agreed to leave the house to Regina. Mamma had 
had an attack of her illness after her return from her 
washing and was now sound asleep. Lafayette had 
not appeared at all. So Regina lit the gas and looked 
around in dismay. The kitchen was in great disorder. 
Mamma lay asleep on the lounge in her favorite atti- 
tude. Regina knew at once what had happened, as if 
the house had fallen into a heap of ruins. Her house 
had fallen. 

“It was too good to last,'’ she said. 

But what had happened to the children ? She 
hastened to set things in order, to get some kind of a 
meal ready, to make it appear as if nothing had really 
happened. She locked the doors to keep out visitors. 
She had plenty of time before the children finally ap- 
peared. 

“Lafe is arrested,” said Beau readily. “He’s been 
gambling, and the police caught him. They’re going 
to send him back to the Home or the reformatory.” 

“He had a fight with a boy to-day, and he lost his 
job,” said Wistaria. “Oh, Regina what are we going 
to do now?” 

“Do as we did before,” replied she. “Sit down and 
have your supper, you children. Mamma’s asleep.” 

Wistaria for some unknown reason began to cry at 
the sight of her mother on the lounge. Regina petted 
her, took her in her arms and smoothed her hair. 
Beau told her the story of his brother’s downfall be- 
tween bites of bread and gulps of tea. She saw the 
hatred in his heart, but did not dream of the part the 
little villain had played in the tragedy. While they 


8o 


The Boy Who Came Back 


were talking a knock came to the door and Regina 
answered it The truant officer of the Ferry stood 
outside with a severe face. 

“Is Mrs. Lawton in?” he asked. 

“Not just now. Perhaps I will do in her place.” 

“Well, I just wanted to find out why the two chil- 
dren, Rochambeau and Wistaria, were out of school 
all this week. I’m the truant officer.” 

“Oh, of course. Mother has not been very well, 
and I suppose she kept them home to help with the 
washing. I’ll tell her.” 

“All right. Miss Lawton. I hope you don’t take 
no offence at my coming in to complain. You see I 
have to do just as I’m told.” 

“No offence whatever, sir. The children will not 
be absent next week.” 

“Oh, yes, they will,” Beau said, when she had closed 
the door on the truant officer. He smiled at her inso- 
lently. He was afraid of no mere girl, so long as 
his brother was absent, and in his success with the 
police he had grown so conceited as to make himself 
the head of the house. Wistaria was looking pale, 
and she grew paler at sight of Regina’s terrible face. 
Beau himself forgot his insolence when she looked at 
him. It was the same look which appeared on his 
brother’s face when trouble was brewing, a look of 
rage and pain and recklessness. She stood in front 
of Beau like a judge and threw questions at him. 

“Do you mean to tell me that you played hookey 
all week and took Wistaria with you?” 

“Just what I did, Regina. Didn’t we play hookey 
before our dear brother came home ? Didn’t the truant 
officer get tired coming here? Did you make any fuss 
over it? Well, I guess not. And now we’re not going 
to school any more. Lafe is gone for good, and we 
are free.” 


The Face at the Window 8i 

really believe,” said Regina calmly, *^that you 
had something to do with putting him in jail.” 

“Right,” he replied. “I caught him at the crap 
game, and I brought the police to the lumber cave. He 
was the only one caught. I helped to lose his job for 
him. You see Tm a respectable man. I can’t asso- 
ciate with jailbirds like Lafe. You may, but Wis and 
I, we’re superior people.” 

He laughed, for Beau was a clever fool. Wistaria, 
not being so clever or so foolish, saw danger in Re- 
gina’s eye and remained silent. Beau was still laughing 
when his sister swept down on him like a hawk on a 
strutting rooster. Her left hand seized him by the 
neck and slammed him on the floor face downwards, 
while her right hand laid a stick across his back and 
legs with resounding whacks. Beau was stunned as 
well as frightened. Wistaria raised a loud wail and 
ran to her sleeping mother. It took a hard struggle 
for Beau to get away from Regina’s grip, and even 
then she chased him around the room, striking him 
madly, while he leaped over the table, dodged under 
it, threw chairs in front of her, and tried to pick 
up a weapon of defence. He was thoroughly fright- 
ened by this time. Wistaria began to scream as the 
tumult increased, for chairs were falling, crockery was 
getting smashed, and Beau made noisy dashes at the 
locked windows. The screams brought Regina to her 
senses, and she threw away the stick and sat down. 
Beau stood on the defensive at the far end of the 
room. Wistaria continued shrieking. 

“Be quiet!” said Regina, and the little girl’s voice 
fell to a whimper. In spite of her agitation she could 
not help smiling in secret at Beau. If ever there lived 
a frightened boy, he was the boy. He was also very 
sore from the blows he had received. It occurred to 
her that the secret of Lafayette’s power over these 


82 


The Boy Who Came Back 


wild children was his readiness with punishment. If 
Beau had been beaten oftener, he would have had more 
respect for his elders. She took up the stick again 
with a most vicious look at him. 

‘"Oh, Regina!’' cried Wistaria, ‘'please don’t kill 
him.” 

“We might as well have murder,” said Regina in a 
deep voice. “This young villain has had his brother 
arrested, and cheated you out of school, and ruined 
our home. It is only right that we should have a 
funeral. He ought to die.” 

She waved the stick at him, Wistaria screamed, and 
Beau too screamed for help. 

“Give me a chance for my life,” he yelled. “Let me 
get a stick too. I can fight if I have half a chance.” 

“Be silent !” said Regina to the two. “I have stood 
enough of your insolence and disobedience. Am I the 
boss of this place, or am I not? Answer!” 

“You are,” they declared with a yell. 

“You will go to school next week, and every week?” 

“All the time,” they screamed again. 

“Then do you come out of that corner, and make 
a confession of your evil deeds, Rochambeau Lawton,” 
and she turned down the big stick, taking a seat as 
majestic as a queen. Beau came out of his corner 
trembling, sore in all his limbs, and his head ached. 
He went to take a chair. 

“Don’t dare to sit down,” Regina thundered. “Get 
on your knees.” 

He fell on his knees and began to cry from the 
hurt of his wounds and bruises. 

“I can’t kneel,” he wailed. “I’m so sore I feel as 
if I was dying.” 

“Oh, if you only would die,” said Regina the heart- 
less. “Sit in a chair over there. See the ruin which 
you have brought upon us. Look at this poor mother, 
who slaved for us all our lives. Look at the wreck 


The Face at the Window 


83 


of our home. After all we did to make it a home you 
wrecked it. Our brother is in jail because you lied 
about him. Look around, villain, and see the work 
of your hands 

Regina had recovered her temper and her wits, but 
felt utterly played out and ready to surrender. In fact, 
she determined there and then that the children should 
be sent to the Home with Lafayette, and she herself 
would go to the city, leaving the mother to shift for 
herself. She would not play her brother’s game of 
bullying the children. 

“Tell all that you had to do with this,” was the order 
to Beau. She was surprised at the length and wicked- 
ness of the confession. It did not seem possible that 
this smooth-faced lad could think out so much wicked- 
ness, and carry it on so well. But here was his 
confession, and no one could dispute the facts. 

“And why did you do it?” she asked in astonish- 
ment. 

“Just to get rid of Lafe.” 

“And why did you want to get rid of him?” 

“Because we were happier before he came. Because 
I was tired of his bossing, and tired of school, and 
tired of church, and tired of everything.” 

“You wish to live like a tramp, I see. To be dirty 
and do as you please, and remain ignorant, and lose 
your soul at the end. But why couldn’t you let other 
people live decently? What did Lafayette ever do to 
you except help you?” 

“I hate him,” said Beau savagely. “I’m glad he’s in 
jail, and that he’ll never get out. I’d do it for him 
again, if I could.” 

“If he ever gets out, you’ll go in,” said Regina, and 
with the word Wistaria gave a cry and pointed to the 
window at the side facing the garden. There against 
the darkness was the face of Lafayette, fixed and 
motionless like a picture in a frame. His eyes were 


84 


The Boy Who Came Back 


studying the room with its smashed furniture, and 
then they fixed themselves on Beau, who sat in abject 
terror, as one who sees a ghost. It was too much for 
the lad, certain as he was that his brother was locked 
up in the jail; and he fell over on the floor in a faint. 
Wistaria ran to him, but Regina did not move. Her 
back was to the window, and when she turned the 
face was gone. Beau had revealed himself as a tricky 
and very wicked boy, and she thought the faint might 
be a little strategem. While Wistaria bathed his face 
in water, there came a soft knock at the door. She 
lowered the gas and remained silent, as a hint for the 
visitor to retire. 


CHAPTER XIII 

OUT ON BAIL 

T he knock came again, and then Lafayette’s voice 
asked for admittance. Regina’s heart leaped 
with joy, she turned on the gas, and tied up 
her hair, hastily arranged the chairs, whispered to 
Wistaria to conceal the broken crockery, shoved the 
stick under the lounge, and went to the door. Then 
she paused a moment. After all that had happened 
would it be wise to let him in? 

‘‘Who is there?” she half whispered. 

“Lafe,” was the reply. 

“No, Lafe is in jail,” she answered. “You are a 
thief trying to get in to rob us. My brother would not 
dare come in here after being in jail.” 

“All rot, Regina,” said the voice. “Don’t judge me 
till you hear the whole story. I’m all right. Father 
Sherwood went on my bail. If you believe Beau 
you’ll get enough lies to last you a life time.” 

She opened the door and he bounced in with confi- 


Out on Bail 85 

dence, like one sure of his welcome. She gave him no 
smile or word. 

''My, but your shoulder is cold tonight, Regina.’' 

He looked at the room, and then at Beau still in 
the faint. 

"Things have been happening,” said he with a smile. 
He knew just what to do with Beau, and had his eyes 
open in one minute by the clock. 

"Dear little brother,” said he in his roguish way, 
"see me heaping coals of fire on your head. After all 
j^ou did to me this week I should be cutting you up 
in little pieces and feeding you to the frogs. Ah, you 
wonder where I haled from, do you?” 

Beau recovered in a terrible fright, and Lafayettt 
laid him beside his mother on the lounge. Then the 
three sat around and waited for the story. 

"It has been a day, hasn’t it?” said Lafayette 
placidly. "I lose my job, brother loses his reputation 
for virtue. Mamma loses her senses, I get into jail, 
some one smashes the furniture, and Beau faints dead 
away. My, but the Lawtons are bound to get into 
the newspapers.” 

"You’re very gay about it,” Regina said coldly. 

He told her the story. When Charlie Haven ar- 
rived at the jail, Lafayette asked his advice on the 
situation, making a clean breast of his share in the 
crap game. 

"It’s the old story,” said Charlie. "You get caught 
and the real parties get away. I thought you were 
smarter than that.” 

"So did I, Charlie, and I turned you down hard 
enough for giving me the warning. I hereby apolo- 
gize. How am I going to get out of here right away? 
I don’t want the smell of the jail on me. Honest, I’m 
trying to do the right thing, and to bring up the family 
straight. Help me, and I’ll swear by you till I 
die.” 


86 


The Boy Who Came Back 


'There’s only one way out,” said Charlie, "and 
that’s to have Father Sherwood go your bail.” 

"Oh, how can I ask him such a thing?” and La- 
fayette made a face. 

"He’s the only one that will care to take the trouble. 
It’s Saturday night and he’s hearing confessions. Then 
he will have to see Judge Thorn and get you a hearing. 
Then he will have to give bail for you. It means a 
lot of trouble, unless you are willing to stay here till 
Monday morning.” 

"I’ll not stay here an hour if I can help it. Go and 
ask the priest. I’d ask the King of England to bail 
me out of this place. Hurry up, Charlie, and I’m your 
friend forever. Whatever you order me to do I’ll 
do it, if it was to go to the Klondike and shovel gold.” 

"All right, but don’t feel too certain Father Sher- 
wood will come down. You know that you haven’t 
been acting square the last two weeks, and he’s heard 
it. If he objects ” 

"Charlie,” said Lafayette, pressing his doleful face 
against the bars, "do for me what you would wanf 
me to do for you in the same fix. Get me out of this 
place. I don’t want it said of me that I was ever in 
jail even by mistake. Get me out, and that’s all.” 

"All right,” said Charlie, and he went away, not 
caring much, if the truth were told, whether the 
prisoner got out or not. As far back as he knew La- 
fayette there was in him too much of the fool and 
the savage ever to permit him to become wise and 
steady. The best place for such chaps is the reforma- 
tory. So he told Father Sherwood when the priest 
asked his opinion. Confessions were over, and the 
grave pastor sat in his study listening to Charlie’s tale. 

"If that’s your opinion,” said he, "why did you 
take the trouble to interfere in his behalf?” 

"Because I promised, and because he helped me 
when his gang attacked me in the lumber yard. They 


Out on Bail 87 

were going to throw me in the river, and I can’t 
swim.” 

''Well, don’t you think that his horror of remaining 
even a night in jail is a good sign? He struck me as 
a fine boy. His sister told me a wonderful story about 
his first three weeks at home.” 

"There’s a still better story about the last week he 
held his job,” said Charlie, proceeding to relate the 
incidents which led to Lafayette’s undoing. 

"Now he’s this kind,” said Charlie, "he starts in 
well, makes a good impression and all that, but he 
winds up in jail, or in a swamp, or a crap game.” 

"He needs some one to stand by him for a while,” 
said the priest, "so here goes to get him out on bail.” 

Half an hour later the two boys were standing in 
the priest’s study; the prisoner was a free boy, grate- 
ful and ashamed. 

"Now, before you go,” said Father Sherwood, "I 
want some guarantee that your behavior will be of 
the right kind. Did you ever hear of a ticket-of- 
leave?” 

"I did, Father,” said Lafayette. "We had them at 
the Home. A fellow gets out on condition of good 
behavior. He reports regular to the Sisters or to 
the priest.” 

"Well, you’re a ticket-of-leave,” said Father Sher- 
wood. "This charge of playing crap will not be 
brought against you as long as you behave. You will 
report to Charlie Haven, and he will report to me on 
your conduct. Remember, the gang, the crap game, 
all gambling, the lumber yard, are to be cut out for 
good.” 

"As sure as Fm born,” replied the boy raising his 
right hand, "no more fool tricks for mine. I’ve 
learned my lesson. It seems fools have to learn it 
twice.” 

"Fools never learn a lesson,” said the priest. "Wise 


88 


The Boy Who Came Back 


men have to learn it twice, and the rest of mankind 
ten to fifteen times. Remember again, Charlie Haven 
is your guardian. If he reports to me any failure on 
your part, I shall ask the judge to send you to the 
reformatory.” 

"‘Fm pleased with the arrangement, but iFs hard on 
Charlie,”* said Lafayette. 

‘‘Oh, I don’t mind,” said Charlie, “only that I don't 
like having to tell on a fellow, and I’m sure I’ll have 
to tell on Lafe before a week passes. He won’t keep 
straight, just because he can’t. I’m telling you before- 
hand, Father, and him too, for I suppose I must do 
my duty to you both.” 

Lafayette looked as if he had been slapped in the 
face by a small boy, but remained silent, while the 
priest said: 

“Every boy must have his third chance. Lafayette 
has twice failed. Three times and out. He has two 
friends now at his back, you and I, Charlie. If he 
fails now he fails forever.” 

“I know that,” said the boy humbly. “If I fail. 
Father, no one will be troubled with me around here 
any more.” 

The boys went home together not at all pleased 
with each other. 

“That was certainly a hot one you handed me,” 
said Lafayette as they walked the street. “Putting 
me down on my back, and me doing my best to get up.” 

“Well, Father Sherwood is always putting these 
nasty jobs on me,” said Charlie. “If you get going 
with the gang again, and he hears it before I do, then 
I get rats. Can I be tracking you day and night? It 
would take a detective from New York to keep tabs 
on you, and you know it. I don’t want to be telling 
on you when you go wrong, and what’s more I won’t.” 

“Well, you needn’t worry so much about it, for I’m 
going to keep straight from this time on. Straighter 


Out on Bail 


89 


than you are, and it^s easy for you, always with your 
Mamma at your back, and the priest in front, and the 
whole church around you. Why, you just smell of 
holy water.'' 

‘‘Well, it's to wait and see," said Charlie, vexed at 
the scorn in the voice of the other. “You begin well 
by insulting the fellow who got you out of jail." 

“Sure enough," said Lafayette to himself, “but how 
this softy roils me." 

When the story ended Regina sat thinking. La- 
fayette felt quite satisfied with himself, and was ready 
to restore everything to its former pleasant shape. He 
cast wondering glances at Beau, who pretended to be 
asleep, and at his unfortunate mother. 

“It's no use," said Regina, in a weary voice. “We 
are a weak family clean through, and nothing can 
make us good. Papa ran away from us. You have 
been jailed twice. And now Beau and Wistaria are 
going the same road. It's no use trying to make a 
home and keep together. So Monday I'm going to the 
city to stay. You three will have to go to the Home, 
and Mamma can get along in her own way." 

At that Wistaria set up a wail and Lafayette got so 
frightened that he felt the ground slipping from under 
him. She was in earnest, and had a right to be dis- 
gusted with her family. He saw that they could get 
along without her if he himself could keep straight; 
but what a lonely house it would be with her place 
vacant ! 

“I don't blame you, Regina," said he softly. “I’d 
do the same if I was in your place. You're respectable 
and we're not. But let me tell you this: I'm on the 
straight path for good. I'll keep these two on the 
same path. Now you may go to the city, say for a 
month. Won't you come back at the end of a month 
when Father Sherwood tells you how fine we've got 
along, all of us?" 


90 


The Boy Who Came Back 


‘If I go ril never come back/' said Regina in her 
despair. “I was so sure this very morning that every- 
thing w^as right! And now look at the house!" 

It was midnight, the room was still in confusion, 
each face was marked with sorrow, each heart was 
heavy with grief and apprehension. It looked indeed 
as if the Lawtons, in Lafayette's phrase, were down 
and out forever. They all looked around the room 
and then at her. Wistaria sobbed. 

‘T'll tell you what we’ll do," said Lafayette the 
courageous. “Let’s pretend that this week was a 
dream. Let’s fix things up tonight, and get out 
to church tomorrow, just the same as if we were mil- 
lionaires. Let’s put on a bright face for one day, even 
if we all go to the poorhouse the day after. Just for 
the fun of it, Regina." 

The conceit caught the poor girl and she agreed. 
Then with Lafayette in the lead they set the house 
in order, got ready the Sunday clothes, roused 
Mamma, had some lunch, and went to bed. 


CHAPTER XIV. 

THE RUNAWAYS 

T O see the Lawtons at church next day one would 
never have suspected the troubles of the week, 
and how close the family had been to ship- 
wreck. Mamma looked pale and her eyes were red, 
but her veil concealed this. Beau was as proper as 
a Boston boy. The terrible eye of his big brother 
never left him. He kept his face to the altar and 
listened to the sermon as if he understood it. No 
word of the arrest had reached the gossipers yet, and 
the fighting in front of the drug store was rather to 
Lafayette’s glory than otherwise. Moreover, he had 


The Runaways 


91 


done a clever thing between breakfast and the time 
for holy Mass. The friendly milkman found him 
waiting for the morning’s milk at six o’clock and gave 
him some information. A boy was wanted to work at 
the house of a rich family not a mile away. The other 
boy had left suddenly, not liking long hours and low 
wages. What Lafayette needed at that moment was 
a job, to shut the mouths of critics: so he got a letter 
of recommendation from the drug store man at seven, 
a second letter from Father Sherwood at half past 
seven, presented the letters to the proper people at a 
quarter of eight, and walked home for breakfast with 
the job in his pocket. 

‘'Lost your job, Lafe?” said the first of the sneerers 
who love to feed on other people’s misfortunes. 

"No, I gave it up to work for the Shermans. I’m 
a chauffeur now at fifteen a week. See what good 
looks does for a fellow. No chance for you, Tom.” 

"I move,” said Lafayette at dinner, "that we begin 
all over again if Regina stays at home. Let bygones 
be bygones. We’ll all brace up and take new resolu- 
tions. Nothing will be done to Beau for his crimes, 
nothing to Wistaria for joining in with him, and 
nothing to me for getting arrested.” 

"I second the motion,” said Regina. "If at first 
you don’t succeed, try, try again. I’ll agree to stay at 
home, and we’ll all begin over again. Let bygones 
be bygones, and let no more be said about it.” 

So they had a merry dinner and a pleasant after- 
noon. But Beau got a private warning from his 
brother. 

"Now I know just what you are, and I want you 
to remember that I’m watching you day and night. 
You’re a Benedict Arnold, only he had courage and 
you’re a blamed coward. You’ll do anything mean if 
you think you won’t get caught. Now listen. We’re 
all right again, we Lawtons. You’ve got another 


92 


The Boy Who Came Back 


chance. Take it and use it right. If I catch you at 
anything that even smells crooked, then it’s you for 
the merry Home. I was wild, but you’re bad. Regina 
saved you from the worst licking ever a fellow got. 
But she won’t be round to save you next time. Do 
you catch on?” 

Beau understood, and was ordered to cross his 
throat and raise his right hand, in token of his deter- 
mination to obey. But tokens and resolves had no 
meaning for Beau. As soon as he could get Wistaria 
alone he mapped out their programme for the week. 

“We must run away tonight, Wis,” said he. “Lafe 
is going to put us in the Home the first time we do 
anything out of the way.” 

“But if we run away,” Wistaria replied, “then Re- 
gina will go to the city, and we’ll be sent to the Home 
anyway.” 

“Well, if we stay we’ll be sent to the Home, and if 
we run away we can go where we please. I’ve got 
all your clothes ready, and a big bag of sandwiches, 
and four dollars. We can go right after dark, and by 
the time they miss us we’ll be far enough away for 
them never to catch us. I’m going anyway, whether 
you go or not.” 

The scheme had already won Wistaria’s heart, so 
she agreed to go. For years these poor children had 
been accustomed to do whatever they pleased, without 
asking leave or advice. Mamma had paid them little 
attention, on account of her work and sickness. Re- 
gina had looked on them as curiosities, until experience 
opened her eyes. Lafayette had been of their kind 
until three years in the Home had taught him the 
proper ways of good children, trained his conscience, 
and given him some inkling of religion. He knew how 
to deal with them. He saw how the crap game had 
taken away his attention from them, and he was bound 
to make up for that failure. He had Beau under 


The Runaways 


93 


his eye all day, and he knew where the sandwiches and 
other supplies for the runaway scheme were hidden. 
It would have been easy to seize the supplies and 
money there and then, but he thought of a better plan. 
Beau ought to be cured of his runaway notions. The 
boy thought that running away was as easy as walking 
around town, easier than going to school. Why not 
let him try it, and then proceed to make life on the 
road miserable for him ? Only Regina must not hear 
of it, or she might get discouraged again, and go 
away to New York. Beau and Wistaria got no 
chance to run away that night, and had to defer their 
plans until the next day, when the others would be at 
work. Even then it was difficult, for Mamma took 
charge of them and got them ready for school. As 
soon as they were free they ran down into the woods 
at the back of the house, where they had hidden the 
food and supplies. In a short time, with little packs 
on their backs, they left the woods and took the rail- 
road track towards Irvington. It was as lovely a day 
as ever was seen on the Hudson. 

“What is the first thing we are to do?” said Wis- 
taria. 

“Take a train at Irvington for Peekskill,” said Beau. 
“Then we’ll tramp back into the country and strike 
the stage road to Albany. I reckon smarty Lafe will 
have the time of his life tracking us after that move.” 

“But have you money enough to buy tickets? Are 
you sure you have it?” 

“Right here,” said Beau, slapping his pockets, and 
then he grew pale, for there was nothing in that pocket. 
He searched his clothes, he searched his sister’s clothes, 
he went through the food packet, he walked back 
studying the track to the hiding place in the woods, he 
stole into his room and examined the clothes there, but 
no money was to be seen. He tried to get at his 
mother’s purse, but knew there was nothing in it. He 


94 


The Boy Who Came Back 


fell into despair. Not once did he dream that his 
watchful brother had removed the four dollars from 
his pockets in order to prevent a long distance trip. 

“We’ll have to change our plans,” he said to Wis- 
taria. “The money’s gone, so we’ll have to foot it 
into the woods, where we can camp out and hide until 
I get work and earn more money.” 

“Camping out will be fun,” said Wistaria, “but how 
long can we keep it up without money?” 

“Not long. We’ll hire out on a farm and make 
money.” 

They trudged across Ardsley Park into the woods 
on the ridge which divided one valley from another. 
By keeping to the ridge they were always out of sight 
of travellers. By marching to the north they avoided 
the main roads. Beau planned to escape the search 
which Lafayette would surely make for him; but his 
brother was travelling right behind the pair, keeping 
them always in view, yet remaining unseen. He was 
preparing to give Beau the fright of his life, so as 
to make running away as frightful as it was dan- 
gerous. 

At noon the children halted at a spring for lunch, 
spread out their sandwiches and cake, and filled their 
tin cups with cold tea. 

“How long do you think our stuff will last?” asked 
Wistaria. 

“What troublesome questions you ask,” Beau com- 
plained. “I don’t care how long they last. We can 
get more at the farm house.” 

“They are only going to last an hour,” said a hoarse 
voice behind them, and a wild-looking man, in a red 
shirt, overalls and fierce whiskers advanced upon them 
waving a bludgeon. The two fled afar, and the wild 
creature gathered in the lunch with satisfaction and 
much laughter. It was Lafayette in disguise. He had 
excused himself from going to work that day in order 


The Runaways 


95 


to follow the children. Beau ran so fast that Wistaria 
began to cry. He had to wait for her to catch up, 
and seeing that the wild man had not pursued them 
he began to get brave and abusive. 

“Let us go back and see what he's doing with the 
sandwiches,” said he. 

‘‘No,” replied Wistaria. “I know right well what 
he’s doing with them. He’s eating them, and he might 
eat us, if he hadn’t enough.” 

“Well, I’m going back,” said Beau. “He may leave 
some behind him. He’s a mere tramp, and we should 
not have run away from him.” 

Wistaria had no choice but to follow him or stay 
alone in the woods. When they came in sight of the 
spring the tramp was gone, but he had not left a crumb 
behind him, nor the tin cup. So the runaways were 
stripped of everything which made an advance upon 
Albany possible. 

“We must find a farm house and ask for something 
to eat,” said Beau, and he began to be downhearted. 
He did not dare to show it, because Wistaria would 
turn cry-baby and ruin the great expedition in an 
hour. They were now three miles from home and 
houses were infrequent; but soon they found one, a 
little cottage in which lived a gardener. As they ap- 
proached it, there leaning on a fence, looking his 
fiercest, was the tramp who had stolen their supplies. 
At sight of them he gave a yell and started in their 
direction, but they fled away into the deep woods and 
soon lost sight of him. There was some mystery about 
the man, however. Every time they approached a 
house in the next two hours there he was between 
them and the house, and always he set up a howl and a 
pursuit together. They could get no food, and were 
very full of spring water. Once they found a few 
early wild strawberries. With empty stomachs, no 
money, and a tramp chasing them, running away lost 


96 


The Boy Who Came Back 


all its charms for Wistaria at an early hour, and for 
Beau a little later. 

“Let's go home,” said she. 

“All right,” said he. “Fll get some more money 
and supplies tonight, and we can make a good start 
tomorrow.” 

Joyfully they turned their faces towards the Ferry, 
and in a few minutes came plump on the wild man 
with the red shirt and the whiskers. He was walking 
ahead of them singing and did not see them. They 
ran into the woods and took another road. There, 
walking ahead of them, was the same tramp or wild 
man singing. Perhaps Beau doubled twenty times in 
an hour, and each time the stranger appeared just 
ahead of them. 

“It must be a ghost,” said Wistaria. 

Even Beau began to be afraid. He saw that this 
stranger was keeping them from home, as he had kept 
them from eating and from getting food. What was 
the meaning of it? What were they to do? It was 
four o’clock in the afternoon and in three hours dark- 
ness would overtake them. 

“Perhaps he’s a gypsy, and wants to steal us,” said 
frightened Wistaria. 

“He can have me for a square meal,” said Beau. 


CHAPTER XV 

NIGHT IN THE WOODS 

I AFAYETTE fell in love with his masquerade of 
j tramp, and forgot his own wise intention of 
giving Beau such a fright as he had never before 
received. He knew the country much better than 
Beau, and was able to head the children off in every 
move. His first plan was to reduce them to abject 


Night in the Woods 


97 


terror, and then appear as their rescuer. But he was 
both heedless and wild at times. When the spirit of 
fun got hold of him he never thought of stopping until 
disaster warned him how far he had gone. He was 
so angry with Beau that he did not stop to think of 
that boy’s vicious temper. It was true that Beau had 
no money or food, could not get any, that he was tired 
and hungry, that Wistaria had lost courage, and 
seemed about to break down utterly ; but he was a boy 
of resource, and he now began to think over the situa- 
tion. If the tramp wanted them why did he not come 
and take them ? Why did he wait and be content with 
keeping them from home? Because he was waiting 
for the darkness, the better to accomplish his designs. 
In that case they must hide right away, and let the 
tramp do the searching. 

‘If he wants to steal us, he’ll have to find us,” said 
he to Wistaria. 

Not far away stood a half-ruined shack, made of 
wood and tar-paper, once inhabited by Italian laborers. 
The door was gone. They had looked it over earlier 
in the day, and acute Beau had discovered one feature 
of it which no one would have thought of. Its back 
wall was a rock, which projected into the cabin. The 
end board was movable, and behind it there appeared 
a hole at the side of the rock, big enough for a human 
being to crawl through. Inside was a little chamber 
six foot square, making a neat hiding-place. 

“There’s our hiding-place,” said Beau, “but he’s as 
sharp as we are, and sharper I guess. We must let 
him see us go there, and let him drive us out, and then 
we’ll go back and hide in the little cave. First let us 
try a trick on him.” 

They found some thick bushes where they could 
peep out and watch the tramp. After half an hour he 
came in sight, looking anxiously around. Lafayette 
thought they had probably taken the back track north. 


98 


The Boy Who Came Back 


and might be making for the railroad station. He did 
not credit Beau with brains enough to trick him. He 
scanned every bush and rock that offered a hiding- 
place, mounted every eminence that gave him a view 
of the country, and at last located them. Then he 
sat down comfortably maybe fifty yards away and 
began to whittle a stick and whistle. 

“He knows where we are,'' said Beau. “Let's get 
off now to the house." It stood equally distant from 
where the three were located. Lafayette caught the 
glint of their clothes moving in a certain direction, 
and arrived in the shack ahead of them. It offered no 
hiding-place except some ancient hay in the corner. 
He crouched under that and made ready for some fun. 
The children stole in highly excited. 

“If we only had a door," said Wistaria. 

“What good would it do ? He would batter it down 
in no time. Let’s sit right here and watch for him. 
As soon as we see him we’ll run right out and as far 
as we can till we get out of sight." 

“I’m so hungry,” sighed Wistaria. She sank down 
in a heap, quite pale and weak, and Beau rallied her 
on her lack of strength and courage. 

“Well, I’m not a boy,” said she, “and if I was I 
don’t think I’d have lost my money, and had my sand- 
wiches stolen so early. Oh, I wish I was home with ' 
Mamma. See how dark it is growing!" 

“Don’t we want it dark, silly? Once this tramp 
gets caught in the dark, he won’t be any better off than 
we are. I’ll get some bread and milk over at McCoy's 
and we can get along till morning." 

Wistaria was just falling asleep and Beau was try- 
ing to think out a way of escape home while he 
watched for the tramp through the open door, when a 
low, long moan, very soft and sad, was heard in the 
shack. They looked at each other with pallid faces. 
Beau looked at the heap of hay and started for it, 


Night in the Woods 


99 


when a louder moan, sadder and deeper, came from 
the pile, which began to move upward slowly. With 
two shrieks the children rushed out the door and down 
the hill into the darker shadows. Lafayette called to 
them in his own voice, but they did not heed. Beau 
looked back once and saw the supposed tramp making 
gestures and laughing, but the sight only hastened his 
steps. It was a long time before their nerves got 
settled down. 

'It was no ghost,” said Beau, for Wistaria was now 
crying. ‘'It was the tramp. I saw him standing in 
the door laughing. Now here we are at a house, 
and I’ll slip in and get some bread and milk, and 
then we’ll run right back to the shack, and hide in 
the cave.” 

“I’d rather stay in the woods all night than go into 
that shack. It’s just full of ghosts,” said Wistaria. 

“All right, do as you please. I’m going to get the 
bread and milk, and then I’m going into the cave, and 
fool the tramp. You can stay out here in the woods, 
and be eaten up by the squirrels.” 

“Then I’ll ask this family where you’re going to get 
the bread and milk to keep me and take me home. I 
can do things as well as you, Smarty. So there !” 

She stamped her foot in a rage and turned her back 
on him. There was a long silence; when she turned 
around again Beau had vanished as if the earth had 
swallowed him. She was alone and the darkness was 
coming on. Looking around she could see no sign of 
a house. She was afraid to move, in fear of the tramp. 
She became so frightened that she could not move, 
and just lay down on the ground weeping and softly 
calling upon Beau to come to her aid. He did return 
in a few minutes with a supply of bread and milk. 
The tramp was nowhere to be seen. 

“Now you just come with me and have no more 
crying,” said Beau. “I’m going straight to the shack 


lOO 


The Boy Who Came Back 


and the cave and make a pleasant night of it. In the 
morning we can find our way home.” 

Wistaria was glad enough to follow him, so as not 
to be alone, and the sight of the bread and milk filled 
her with courage to face the ghosts. They approached 
and entered the shack cautiously, pulled aside the loose 
board, entered the cave, and put the board in place 
again. Beau had a candle end left from his supplies, 
and after making sure that the light could not be seen 
he lit it and stuck it in the side of the cave. Talking in 
whispers, so as not to be heard by the tramp, they made 
a comfortable meal, chatted for a while on the plans 
of the future, and then lay down to sleep. They were 
two very miserable and disappointed children. The 
cave smelled awfully, the ground was hard in spite of 
the old hay as a pillow and mattress, every moment 
they expected to see the tramp appear and carry them 
off, and they secretly resolved, if they got out of this 
scrape, never to run away again. The most wretched 
of all, however, was Lafayette, who had let his love 
of fun run away with his discretion. The children 
were now lost in fact, and the darkness made it im- 
possible for him to trace them. His plan had been 
to have them safe home before Regina returned from 
work. For if she heard of the runaway, it would be 
farewell to home and family. She would pack up and 
away to the city at once. By this time she was at 
home, and they were not. Then Lafayette began to 
knock his thick wooden head for its lack of foresight. 
All the more was he bent on finding the children that 
night, so he began to follow the workings of Beau’s 
busy brain. He was such a tricky fellow. 

“And the best trick he could work,” said his brother, 
“would be to go back to the shack and hide there.” 

So he stole up to the place on tiptoe and peered in. 
No sign of the children. He lit a match, and its light 
showed the place vacant. He lingered around outside 


Night in the Woods 


lOI 


thinking. He remembered that Beau was a loud 
snorer, unusual in a child. He put his ear to the 
ground and listened. With joy after a minute he 
caught the faint, steady rumble of a snore, but it 
seemed far away. Perhaps there was a cellar to that 
shack. Inside he heard the sound more distinctly, and 
soon traced it, not to a cellar, but to a space behind 
the rock. He found the entrance to the cave in a 
jiffy, because these hiding-places were familiar to him. 
Very softly he stole in and lit a match. There lay the 
children sound asleep, and he could have laughed for 
joy. It was only eight o’clock, and they could be at 
home in an hour. Explanations would be easy enough 
after getting home. He remembered his plan to rescue 
the children from danger in the nick of time, and so, 
instead of awaking them on the spot, he stole back into 
the shack, and began to play a little drama of his own 
devising. He laid aside wig and whiskers and red 
shirt, appearing in his own natural guise. Then he 
began to talk in a deep rough voice, which he answered 
in his own voice. What Beau and Wistaria heard in 
the cave, as they sat there with arms around each 
other trembling, went in this fashion: 

‘‘You tramp, why do you pursue these children?” 
said the voice of Lafayette. 

'T intend to take them to the gypsies and sell them 
for fifty dollars,” said the voice of the tramp. ‘Tf you 
want to stand in with me, Fll give you ten for your 
help.” 

‘"What, sell my own sister and brother? Never! 
Away with you, before I knock you over!” 

“Oh, that’s your game, is it? You want to steal 
them yourself,” said the tramp’s voice. “Well, if it’s 
to be a fight for them, here goes in the dark.” And 
with that there began such a rumpus in the shack as 
made the children tremble still more. The tramp was 
fighting Lafayette, and by the noise it was a fearful 


102 


The Boy Who Came Back 


combat. The two men leaped and danced all over the 
place, they shook the frail walls, they panted and 
shouted, they called each other names, for five minutes. 
At last Lafayette shouted: 

“Beau, come and help me, he’s winning and you are 
lost.” 

Beau struggled to his feet with the shrieking Wis- 
taria hanging on to him, lit his candle, and seized a 
stick. When he got into the shack there was a crash 
at the door, and the sound of running steps, the thud 
of a heavy stone. 

“Take that, you coward,” said the voice of La- 
fayette, who then staggered into the shack, with his 
hair standing on end, his clothes torn, his face dirty, 
and his breath gone. He sat down exhausted on the 
floor. Wistaria ran in and threw her arms around 
him. 

“It’s all right,” said he. “I walloped the tramp and 
he has fled. Oh, what a narrow escape you had ! It 
was only by accident I came on this place, just as he 
had found out your hiding-place. He was going to 
sell you to the gypsies. Oh, hurry up and get away 
from this den as fast as you can. All the tramps 
sleep here, and there may come a dozen any minute.” 

With exclamations of fear and horror the three 
fled from the place, and took the shortest cut home. 
It was after nine when they stole to bed without seeing 
Mamma and Regina. Lafayette said he would explain 
everything to the women, who were sitting quietly in 
the kitchen as if nothing had happened. Satisfied with 
the ending of the play, but uneasy about the results, 
Lafayette joined them. 


More Trouble 


103 


CHAPTER XVI. 

MORE TROUBLE 

"V TEITHER Mamma nor Regina seemed to be sur- 
prised at his appearance, but kept on chatting 
amiably as if nothing had happened. Mamma of 
course never expressed astonishment, even if the 
heavens threatened to fall around her; but Regina 
worried over many things, and talked about her wor- 
ries. Tonight she was gay and chatty about herself 
and her neighbors, and seemed to avoid talking of 
home matters. No questions were asked about his 
new job, or the children, or anything that would give 
him a chance to smooth over matters. So Lafayette 
had to break into the subject of domestic affairs in 
order to find out where they all stood. 

'What would you like for dinner tomorrow, Re- 
gina?” he asked. 

'Tt doesn't matter what I like,” she replied, "because 
in a boarding-house one has to take what is placed 
on the table, or leave it.” 

"Then you are going away?” he asked with a gasp. 

"Oh, no. I have already gone. I went this morn- 
ing. I had lunch in my new home today. I came up 
tonight to get my things. So I feel just like a visitor.” 

"And what do we feel like?” he answered savagely. 
"You are throwing up the game just when the family 
has a chance to get along. With you and me working 
Mamma might stay at home and look after the kids. 
Now she'll have to live at the washtub till I can make 
twenty dollars a week.” 

"Which will be never,” said Regina severely. "You 
are great on rainbows, Lafe. They look well, but they 
don't wear well, and when you get close to them, 
there's nothing to be found but soap and water like 


104 


The Boy Who Came Back 


a soap bubble. You needn’t preach. It was you who 
drove me to the city by your bad actions, and it is you 
who will keep me there.” 

'‘And what are we going to do, Mamma?” said he 
to his mother. 

“Just as we did before,” said Mamma in her easy 
way. “There’s no use crying over spilt milk. People 
have to get along no matter what happens. Regina 
will do very well in the city, where she will have no 
one to bother. It’s very wearing where children are, 
and then the travel up and down on the train. We 
shall get along very well. I’m sure, and Regina’s health 
will be so much better.” 

“Her health !” and he laughed loud in scorn. “As if 
she didn’t have more health than any two girls need.” 

“Well, I am not here to argue,” said Regina. “I 
am visiting, and I want to enjoy my visit with Mamma. 
So if you’ll go to bed you’ll oblige, Lafe.” 

“Gee, but you’ve travelled a good ways off from us 
already,” said he, smarting under the slap. Then the 
unbidden tears began to stream down his cheek. He 
was ashamed of them, but his heart was crushed at the 
loss of his sister. 

“Oh, you needn’t feel so bad about it,” said Regina. 
“I’ll come up now and then to see how you are doing, 
and you may come down to see me on holidays. I’ll 
help Mamma with a little money. I’ll be glad to show 
you around the city when you come down, and maybe 
after a few years I’ll come back and live here.” 

“You needn’t come back,” said he hotly, jumping 
up, “and you can keep your money, and stay in the 
city. I don’t want to see you again, ever, either here 
or there. You are just as much bound to help the 
family as I am, and yet you run away for just one 
mistake and leave Mamma and me to do all the work 
and bear all the trouble.” 

“Now that isn’t fair,” said Regina. “I tried for a 


More Trouble 


105 


year before you arrived, to get our home into shape, 
and I failed. I helped you when you tried, and I 
warned you just how much I would stand, and you 
failed. It’s in our agreement that you should leave 
this house and this town, if I should ask you, when 
you failed. But I leave instead of you, so that you 
can have a home, and help Mamma, and learn how 
to get along.” 

He had forgotten their agreement. It was he that 
should go instead of Regina, but with her usual gen- 
erosity she was making the sacrifice. 

'Well, if I go will you stay?” said he. 

"No, Lafe. I have gone. I have made up my 
mind, and I am going to stick to it, even if you all 
became saints this minute.” 

So he went up to his room, lit the gas, and looked 
at Beau in bed with a most ferocious expression. Beau 
had not slept. The mischances of the day had been 
too much for his nerves, and he just tossed and tossed 
about, falling into slumber only to be chased by the 
tramp, or to be robbed by woodrangers. He would 
not take that road again for a thousand dollars. He 
knew now that the only way to leave town forever 
was in the train with a real ticket for Buffalo or Chi- 
cago, and enough money in pocket to pay all bills. He 
began to think over schemes for making money, and 
had thrown away three when Lafayette came in and 
frowned on him. 

"What do you think,” said he. "Regina is going 
to leave. She has left. She has a boarding-house in 
the city, and all because of me, the gambler, and you, 
the oyster who tried to imitate Sherlock Holmes. If 
you weren’t already scared to death, I think I could 
give you a better scare.” 

A sense of calamity was hanging over Beau, a feel- 
ing of apprehension. He did not care much who came 
or went, while his own comfort was undisturbed. He 


io6 The Boy Who Came Back 

had wished for Regina’s absence, and even planned for 
it ; but now his nerve and his impudence and his selfish- 
ness were gone together, and his brother's news over- 
whelmed him. His face began to work, and he would 
certainly have cried out in grief but for an interrup- 
tion from Wistaria's room. She had been unable to 
sleep after the fright of the day, and so heard her 
brother's remarks. Regina had petted her to the spoil- 
ing point. Flight to the city spelled real calamity for 
Wistaria, and she at once raised her voice in a pitiful 
wail. She tumbled out of bed in her nightgown and 
almost fell down the stairs into the kitchen. Regina 
ran to meet her. Lafayette ran after her to quiet her. 
Beau ran after Lafayette, and joined his wail to Wis- 
taria's. And so the three sprawled in the kitchen to- 
gether, hanging on to Regina, beseeching her to stay 
with them and Mamma, and not to desert them. In 
vain the astonished girl sought to quiet them. The 
more she pleaded the louder they wailed. Mamma 
sat by placidly, waiting for the storm to subside. La- 
fayette saw the value of the situation, and helped to 
increase the wailing and the loudness of the petitions ; 
and in the midst of the trouble there was a knock at 
the door, which Lafayette opened to admit Father 
Sherwood himself. What a grand hush followed ! 

ought to apologize for intruding at this hour," 
said he, just as if nothing was going on. “But I saw 
the light in the kitchen, and I wanted to find out how 
you were getting on." 

“You must come up to the parlor. Father," said 
Regina. 

“I prefer the kitchen, it is so cosy. Let us stay just 
where we are, and talk matters over. And what re- 
port have you to make of the Lawtons?" 

“You must look to Lafayette for reports. Father. 
He is now the head of the family, first assistant to 
Mamma. I have gone to the city to live." 


More Trouble 


107 


Wistaria began to wail again, sitting in her sister’s 
lap, and Regina had to soothe her into quiet. Beau 
was hiding behind Mamma. 

“Then I see that you have lost hope, and at the 
same time confidence in this good boy just because 
he got arrested by accident.” 

How Lafayette’s heart beat with pride at this praise ! 
He a good boy! He felt so, in his repentance, even 
if the early record was against him. God bless the 
dear priest for the word, he said to himself. 

“You see,” said Regina, in her own defence, “it was 
all in our agreement. I agreed to let him stay on 
trial a month. If he succeeded in remaining good, 
there was nothing more to be said. If he did not, he 
was to leave the house and the town on payment of 
ten dollars. I leave in his place, because I know how 
to take care of myself, and he does not. I warned 
him against bad company and other things, but he 
would not be warned.” 

“A young man must get more than one chance,” 
said Father Sherwood, and he looked so easy and 
comfortable that Lafayette began to hope. “How can 
you 'forget his success of the past month? A lad who 
can do so much in so short a time with no help really 
deserves three chances. Now I would be willing to 
wager that on the next chance Lafayette will make 
good. But he must have all possible help. Rome was 
not built in a day.” 

Regina felt that she was losing ground, so she sent 
the children back to bed, and then had her brother de- 
scribe the adventures in the woods that day. Father 
Sherwood laughed heartily at the description. 

“Fine ! Fine ! Beau will be slow to run away a second 
time. And after that clever trick, and many others 
since his return, you are willing, Regina, to desert 
the answer to your prayers ?’' 


io8 The Boy Who Came Back 

“I am not so sure he is the answer to my prayers, 
Father/' 

''1 am quite certain he is. You must give him 
another chance. I shall be his sponsor, and make all 
the promises. You and he are made to save this fam- 
ily from destruction. But you must be patient in 
building up, as others were steady in pulling down. I 
shall help in the scheme, and I have a little plan to 
propose, which will aid you very much.” 

They listened with beating hearts, Regina still ob- 
stinate. 

'‘Your main trouble xiere is that, with mother work- 
ing away from home, there is no real head to the house. 
Now she must stay at home and take charge of every- 
thing. She must give up washing and make money 
by taking boarders. To begin with, one lady will take 
her parlor and pay ten dollars a week for board during 
the summer. She is a friend of mine, a teacher of 
elocution and deportment and drama, who wants a 
quiet place for the summer. I recommended her to 
come here.” 

“Just the thing,” said Lafayette. “One more boarder 
like that and Mamma need never look at a washtub 
again.” 

“I see that I must give in,” said Regina. “But I 
feel bad, because I know now just how it will end, 
and you will have all your trouble and kindness for 
nothing. Father.” 

“I am willing to take the risk,” said the priest, “but 
this good boy never failed any one yet, and never 
will. It’s his nature to be faithful. Because he trips 
once in a while, no one should despair.” 

He patted Lafayette’s bushy head and pressed his 
hand, and went on to tell about boys whom he had 
known, and successes which even the weakest had 
won; so that by the time of his departure Regina was 
reconciled and even cheerful, and Mamma became so 


The Veiled Lady 


109 

gay that for the first time they saw that her placidity 
often hid real feeling. Lafayette went to bed in tri- 
limph and said most fervent prayers. 


CHAPTER XVII 

THE VEILED LADY 

I AFAYETTE informed the children of their good 
jl luck before he went to sleep, and of the scheme 
for taking boarders. It was the one thing which 
fetched Regina, he said, and therefore they three must 
love and cherish that boarder as if she were an heiress 
to millions. 

“Who is she ? What does she look like ?’' said Wis- 
taria. 

“She's an actress," said Lafayette, drawing on his 
imagination to impress his listeners deeply. “She goes 
around in long clothes, with picture hats and veils 
spangled with stars. She talks like this." 

And he gave an imitation of Lady Macbeth walking 
in her sleep, rubbing her hands, and groaning. 

“She lives on cake and ice cream and mince pie and 
hot and cold chocolate,” he went on, “and never looks 
at any one except very great people. To a woman 
like that you two would look like dots. So be careful 
not to get too near her unless she asks you." 

“An actress !" exclaimed Wistaria. “Oh, won’t that 
be just too lovely for anything!" 

Beau was awed but not impressed by his brother’s 
description, and he treasured the thought of cake, ice 
cream, mince pie and chocolate. He knew well where 
the choice foods were kept. Wistaria fell asleep think- 
ing of her wardrobe for the mysterious bride, secretly 
determined to wear it for the first appearance of the 
boarder. 


no 


The Boy Who Came Back 


Next morning Lafayette was up early for many 
things: to get Regina's breakfast, set the parlor in 
order for the newcomer, and have a familiar chat with 
his sister over the new terms. She could not but 
smile at his alertness and the pretty breakfast. It was 
a different thing from her boarding-house in the city, 
and she said so and thanked him in her sweet way. 

“But it's too good to last !" she sighed. 

“As you remarked before. Miss Lawton. And I 
suppose you will remark it many times again until 
you get married, when we must lose you anyway." 

“I shall never get married," said she. “What, after 
Mamma's experience, and my experience with you 
and Beau? Well, you must have a queer idea of me! 
Don't forget that I stay here because Father Sherwood 
insisted on it. Let us have no misunderstandings. I 
don’t trust you any more, and you’ll have to work a 
long time before I'll get any trust in you or any other 
man." 

“Miss Lawton," said he, posing like the hero in a 
play, “I do not like your tone nor your language, but 
I hope the ham and eggs and coffee suit you.” 

“They do, but they rile me, to think that ham and 
eggs should be so good, and human hams so cheap," 
and she cut her meat viciously. 

“One on me. Will you have your toast buttered on 
both sides?" 

Who could help laughing at the rogue, and so she 
had to be good-natured and kiss him good morning. 
Mamma and the children came down to breakfast later, 
and he left them for work with a general warning. He 
would be at home at six o’clock. Mamma was to carry 
out a bill of fare for dinner which he had made out 
according to his ideas of what an actress ate, the chil- 
dren were to go to school, and they were to be ar- 
rayed in their best to welcome the boarder, who was 
to arrive that afternoon. 


The Veiled Lady 


III 


‘I'm going to have my hair cut pompadour by the 
barber," he said. “Wistaria, you better do the same. 
Beau, have yours painted green to match your face. It 
will please the lady." 

“Now don't quarrel, children," said Mamma. 

“Beau and I never quarrel," said Lafayette, and 
Beau was too tired and worn to answer back. 

The coming of the boarder was not so accidental as 
it appeared at first. Father Sherwood was a clever, 
resourceful man, who had many ways of arriving at 
success. He had been watching the Lawton family 
for some months with a single eye for the problem 
which there confronted him. He had studied the 
methods of Lafayette from afar but with attention, 
and saw very soon that the Lawtons would never be 
lifted out of their misery by any force within. They 
needed help from outside, the help of human charity 
as well as the help of divine grace ; and so he devised a 
little scheme to secure for them that help. It came 
about quite by accident. Miss Devere informed him of 
her intention to spend the summer months in Silver 
Ferry, and asked him to recommend a respectable 
boarding-house, suited to her needs. She was very 
particular, but not exacting. He gave her a precise 
account of the Lawtons and their spare rooms, without 
saying one word of his reasons for sending her to the 
place. Miss Devere was an original character, a 
woman who did what she pleased and did it very well. 
She dressed without regard to fashion, and she lived to 
her taste. People thought her singular, but she had 
good sense, a fondness for children, and a great love 
of her work. 

“I recommend the Lawtons," he said to her on her 
arrival, “because you will be quite free from the 
usual obligations of the boarding-house. There will 
be no other boarder but you. The house is old- 
fashioned and charming. It is near the river. Mother 


112 


The Boy Who Came Back 

Lawton is a good cook and a peaceable woman. Her 
daughter Regina is a charming girl who works all day 
in the city. Her son Lafayette has had a brilliant 
career for a country village, but he is now subdued. 
He’s clever. Her other son, Rochambeau, is a quiet 
oddity with a dash of the devil in him. Her other 
daughter. Wistaria, is romantic and given to cheap 
novels and acting.” 

‘‘What a collection of names!” said Miss Devere. 
“I am interested in the family already.” 

“You need not be. They will never bother yoU, 
being simple people, who will regard you as too high 
for their circle. You will have perfect peace all sum- 
mer.” 

“And the girl given to acting, has she any talent?” 

“I don’t know. Let me hear how you like the place 
as soon as you have made up your mind.” 

He knew very well that Miss Devere would become 
deeply interested in the Lawtons before she had been 
with them a week. She had come to the Ferry to rest 
after a fatiguing season of work and travel, but she 
could never really rest. Her pleasure was in doing 
good everywhere, and the priest looked to see a great 
change in the family from her influence. He was a 
very cunning man. Father Sherwood. Just one sen- 
tence from him had almost made a man of Lafayette, 
and had reconciled Regina to her wild brother many 
a time: that he was the answer to her prayers. It was 
going to save them all yet. Now he was sending a 
talented woman to live among the Lawtons and to do 
by example what lecturing could never do. Fie knew 
just what would happen in the Lawton household in 
a week. Miss Devere would be studied by the wild 
creatures around her just as the wild things in the 
woods study a human being. If you lie down in the 
woods and pretend to be sleeping, making no noise 
and no movement, all sorts of wild things will steal 


The Veiled Lady 


113 


up to examine you. They know everything in the 
woods but the stranger. So bugs will crawl over you 
in great wonder, rabbits will sniff at you, and the news 
of your presence will be telegraphed for a long dis- 
tance. The Lawtons would study Miss Devere in that 
way. Wistaria would imitate her clothes, her walk, 
her speech; Mamma would use her best language in 
conversation ; Regina would love her as a friend ; Beau 
would sneer, but would soon fear the sharp tongue 
and the boring look ; and Lafayette would play cavalier 
and show her around. Very soon they would begin 
to love her and to learn by love, which is always the 
best means of learning. Father Sherwood hoped 
much from Miss Devere. Then he started another 
scheme. He gave Charlie Haven a little commission 
to keep him busy all summer. Charlie was bright but 
a trifle conceited and also delicate. The priest liked 
him because he was a good altar-boy and a good 
worker; but he would also like to see him with the 
rough-and-ready spirit which belongs to the boy, just 
as Lafayette had it. He wanted Lafayette to have 
some of Charlie's refinement. Each had qualities 
which the other lacked. 

''Now," said Father Sherwood to himself, "why 
should these boys not give and take? Let Charlie 
get some of Lafe's rough fibre and Lafe get some 
of Charlie's delicate fibre. What one needs is a chum 
of better training than his own to keep him up* to the 
mark. What Charlie needs is the boldness to meet 
life which the other has. So here goes to throw them 
together." 

Charlie had no liking for Lafayette and he did not 
take kindly to the plan. 

"After some trouble," said the priest to Charlie, 
"I have coaxed the Lawtons to behave a little better. 
Now I want you to help me in keeping them on the 
right road. What do you say?" 


The Boy Who Came Back 


114 

**V\\ do what I can, Father, but what can I do?’' 

“Could you not get in with Lafayette and influence 
him for good?” 

“There’s nobody can influence him but a policeman, 
Father. He feels himself too big to take lessons from 
me. You run the risk of a fight if you speak too plain 
to him. I want to keep out of fights.” 

“Quite right, but will you try to do something?” 

“If you say so, yes.” 

“That’s all I want. Do your best. There’s one 
thing all you boys seem to lack: willingness to influ- 
ence one another. It is all right to give advice, but 
most people do not want advice till they ask for it. 
Now you live in the same house with the Lawtons, 
and yet you have no use for them, nor they for you. 
If you had just acted as neighbors, pleasant and help- 
ful, and put in a good word now and then, in a casual 
way, you might do them some good. For example, 
a stranger does you a good turn on the road, gives 
you a ride, or a banana, just when a banana tastes 
good: how that simple act brightens your mind.” 

“I get the idea,” said Charlie, ''just as if what you 
do is of no consequence.” 

“Exactly,” said the priest. “Will you do it that 
way?” 

“It’s the only way with the Lawtons, but I never 
thought of it.” 

So it was agreed. Father Sherwood felt satisfied. 
He had two people working among the Lawtons in a 
pleasant way. No one would suspect it. The poor, 
weak Lawtons would fall in love with Miss Devere 
and worship her. Indeed, that was almost her first 
report, as with many a laugh she described her first 
impressions of the dear souls. 

“I did not think,” said she, “that such curious and 
interesting people existed outside of fairy-land. They 
named me at the very first. The Veiled Lady, in capital 


The Queen 


115 

letters, because I wear a veil so much. They are all 
romantic. They act as they feel. They dream 
dreams. I am very careful not to disturb their ways.” 

'‘Small chance you have,” said Father Sherwood. 
“They will never change, the poor Lawtons. No one 
can change them.” 

“But they are human,” she replied, “and that means 
change.” 

“I think they are fairies. In twenty years no one 
has changed them, and they have not changed them- 
selves.” 

Miss Devere seemed to think the matter over, but 
she made no reply. The priest knew that her thought 
was to change the Lawtons. 

“She can do it,” he said, “but it will be a very queer 
job.” 

CHAPTER XVIII 

THE QUEEN 

1 AFAYETTE arrived home early that evening in 
^ order to make sure of the preparations for the 
dinner. He had made out a regular bill of fare, 
based on his ideas of distinguished people. Besides 
the ordinary courses, soup, meat and dessert, he had 
added angel cake, ice cream and chocolate, with 
oranges in reserve, in case the boarder should make 
a request for fruit. Mamma had all things in readi- 
ness, and looked very sweet in a gray dress. Lafa- 
yette put a flower in her hair, and tied the left locks 
securely against their habit of drooping over one eye. 
He scanned his brother and sister severely. Wistaria 
looked smart and Beau had condescended to a clean 
collar and fresh tie. At the same time a guilty look 
lingered in his face, and from behind his glasses he 
cast timid and wicked looks at his brother. 

“You've been doing something out of the way,” 


ii6 The Boy Who Came Back 

Lafayette told him, “and I’ll find it out before you 
go to bed. What do you think of the boarder; did 
you see her?” 

“She’s a star all right,” Beau answered. “But I 
don’t know how we’re going to live in the same house 
with her, or eat at the same table.” 

“Well, do it this way, little brother. Live just the 
same as you did before, only keep your feet off the 
table while she’s around. Eat just as usual, but never 
take the last piece of bread on the plate, and ask for 
what you want. Don’t practise the boarding-house 
reach in front of her, I tell you. Now let me see that 
we have all ready before Regina comes in and I ring 
the bell.” 

He went over the details of the bill of fare with his 
mother, located each article as he named it, and made 
the sorrowful discovery that the lady fingers, delect- 
able small sponge cakes, had vanished to the last one. 
Regina arrived in time to hear of this calamity, and 
to see the guilty look deepen on Beau’s face. 

“He’s a born crook, that fellow,” said Lafayette, 
shaking his fist at him. “Well, I’ll hear you say your 
prayers to-night, old chap, and give you a fine taste 
of how they pray in purgatory with the fire at their 
heels.” 

“Well, what do you leave the cake around for?” 
Beau complained, for he had said his prayers more 
than once in his brother’s purgatory. “I wouldn’t 
have touched them if I hadn’t run across them.” 

“No time to argue now. Everybody in place. I’m 
going to ring the bell for the Queen. When she comes 
in Mamma will introduce us, and we’ll all stand till 
she sits down. Attention !” 

The bell rang and presently steps were heard com- 
ing down the stairs to the kitchen. Beau opened the 
door and Miss Devere swept in like the leading lady 
in a play, dressed simply enough, but to the children 


The Queen 


117 

she looked like a tragedy queen. Tall and stately, 
with fluffy silver hair and flashing eyes, a face like 
marble, and a dignified walk, her few jewels sparkling 
on her hand, she seemed to the Lawtons a being from 
another world. 

How could she stoop to eat in a kitchen with such 
a tribe, Lafayette thought, as Mamma introduced her 
children in order. Miss Devere’s voice was like music, 
and her manner like an angel’s. She chatted just as 
easy as if she had known them all their lives. 

'‘Delighted to meet you. Miss Lawton. So nice to 
have a young man in the family, Lafayette. Young 
men are so scarce in the summer. Rochambeau, you 
will soon be a young man like your handsome brother. 
Wistaria, how happy you must be with such a sister 
and such brothers.” 

‘•‘The same to you,” Lafayette managed to say, while 
Beau choked back a snicker. They all sat down to- 
gether, and Miss Devere spent most of her time help- 
ing the children. She scarcely thought of her own 
needs, and they saw that she ate next to nothing. She 
just sipped a little of the soup, passed the meat and 
vegetables by, and ate her share of the angel cake and 
the cream, taking a cup of chocolate. In ten minutes 
they were all talking with her as if they had known 
her many years, and yet they did not at the time notice 
the pleasant familiarity. Miss Devere laughed at the 
funny sayings of Lafayette, and provoked him to de- 
scribe life at the Home. 

It became clear to the lad that he was impressing 
the Queen, in spite of the efforts of Regina to sup- 
press him. She was very much shocked at the candid 
talk of her brother before this strange and distin- 
guished lady, and surprised that Miss Devere seemed 
to encourage him. 

“Are the people for whom you are working 
wealthy?” asked Miss Devere. 


ii8 The Boy Who Came Back 

''Wealthy!” he exclaimed. "Why, in that family 
all the children are born with gold teeth. There’s 
so much gold in the family that it runs in the blood. 
They have to get dentists to take out the gold teeth 
and let the ivory kind have a chance.” 

"Well, of all the fibs!” said Regina. 

"Do you like the ice cream?” asked Lafayette. 

"Very much. It has the real country flavor.” 

"You would have had lady fingers with it, but 

"I think we may say grace now,” Regina inter- 
rupted, and they all stood up while Lafayette gravely 
repeated the accustomed prayers. Then he sprang to 
the door and threw it open for the Queen. 

"Thank you,” said she, "but I have a plan in my 
mind for the evening. I am so pleased at being here, 
that I suggest we all clear the table, and then go out 
on the veranda and watch the sun go down. I mean 
the entire family. And as the work must be done 
first, let us all do it together.” 

"Anything you say. Miss Devere,” Lafayette re- 
plied for all. So they set to work gaily, the Queen 
removing her rings and working with the rest, while 
Beau made sneering remarks to his brother on his new 
job of watching the sun go down. But he did his 
share of work, for he was curious about the ways of 
Miss Devere. He meant to ask her for a close look 
at her diamond ring. His brother caught him staring 
hard at the jewel and gave him a sign which meant 
awful things. Beau had to put a guard on his eyes. 
He could not escape the vigilance of Lafayette, but he 
could tease him. When the work was done, and the 
whole party started for the stairs. Beau flung open 
the door before his brother could get to it; so Lafa- 
yette offered his hand to the Queen to lead her up the 
stairs. 

"How polite you all are, and how kind,” said she 
in her silvery voice. 


The Queen 


119 

The sun was just vanishing behind the hills on the 
west bank of the Hudson, and the scene was very 
charming. The children had often wondered where 
the ball of fire went, after sinking behind the hills, 
but had paid no attention to the glories of earth and 
sky in the slowly fading colors of a sunset. Now 
they saw in Miss Devere’s beautiful face, as her dark 
and mournful eyes gazed into the west, feelings which 
warned them there was more in a sunset than they 
had ever thought of. 

'Tf I told the fellows that I sat with the Queen look- 
ing at a sunset, telling off the colors, pink and red and 
saffron and yellow, like a girl at a ribbon counter, and 
rolling my eyes like an opera singer, they’d have a fit 
all right. But somehow it seems the right thing to do 
just now.” 

This was Lafayette’s remark to himself, but aloud 
he said, 

'What do you see in the sunset. Miss Devere ?” 

"Oh, it’s just so pretty! Each one sees for himself. 
Our life is like the setting sun. After the long day 
is over we fall into the grave like the sun falling be- 
hind the hills. We die, and the life goes out of our 
faces as the light of the sun leaves the earth. Then 
our faces grow sad and pale and dark as the night of 
death deepens. I have seen so many pass into the 
shadows that the setting sun reminds me of death al- 
ways. Then I must get up in the morning to see the 
sun rise, which reminds one of life. Perhaps you 
see something else in sunset?” 

"I see the end of the day’s fun,” said Beau. 

"I see bedtime, which I don’t like,” said Wis- 
taria. 

"I see my chance to get away from the office, and 
I am happy,” said Regina. 

"I see a gold mine in the west, which I am going to 
find some day,” said Lafayette. 


120 


The Boy Who Came Back 


'The usual rainbow,” Regina answered, with a look 
which Miss Devere understood. 

“Are you a finder of rainbows ?” asked she. 

“No, he makes them, but can’t sell them,” Regina 
answered. 

“You’ll have to admit I found one, Regina,” he re- 
torted, and only Regina understood that he meant Miss 
Devere. By this time they were all so gathered about 
the Queen that she could not move with comfort. 
Beau was handling her rings and the girls feeling the 
texture of her dress, while Mamma listened to the 
conversation as one listens to delightful music. Miss 
Devere pictured for them the fading colors of the day, 
the first shadows of the night, the twilight, the com- 
ing of the stars, in a way which charmed them. She 
seemed to be talking of people rather than things, 
giving them features and voices and language. All 
were astonished and the spell might have lasted until 
bedtime, but that the lady broke it herself. 

“Now here have I been entertaining you all for over 
an hour, and you have done nothing to entertain me,” 
she complained. “Let us adjourn to the parlor, where 
each one may speak a piece or sing a song or dance a 
dance for me. Don’t you think that’s fair?” 

“I do most certainly,” Lafayette answered with his 
grandest air. “I move that we adjourn to the parlor, 
where Wistaria will act the Mysterious Bride after 
swallowing her diamonds, and Rochambeau will imi- 
tate a chimpanzee having a tooth pulled, and Miss 
Lawton will be herself for the first time to-day, and 
your humble servant will do the rainbow song-and- 
dance, introducing a real rainbow.” 

He looked hard at Regina and the Queen applauded 
softly. They all went in and took seats, while Regina 
lit the gas and began to play the hostess. Lafayette 
took charge of the program. The three ladies were 
seated like an audience at the far end of the room. 


The Queen 


121 


The stage was supposed to be near the piano at the 
front window. Wistaria put on her wreath and veil 
and recited some dramatic scenes from her favorite 
story. Beau recited a lively ballad in good style, so 
as to show he was not a chimpanzee. To music by 
Wistaria, Lafayette sang a plantation song and danced 
a plantation dance with great vigor. They were all 
encored by the audience many times. At the conclu- 
sion Miss Devere praised them highly, and then said 
impressively, 

‘‘I have an idea, which came to me frorrl this pleas- 
ant performance. Why should we not form a com- 
pany and give an entertainment for the benefit of the 
church 

They looked at her in astonishment, too stunned to 
speak. The Lawtons give an entertainment for the 
benefit of the church ! 

‘‘Talk of rainbows!'' said Lafayette when his breath 
returned. 

“Well, here are three ladies," said Miss Devere, 
“and two young men. We would require two more 
young men perhaps. That would make a company 
of seven. I have seen some beautiful plays presented 
with seven players." 

“Like us?" and he waved his hands about the Law- 
tons. 

“Don't laugh," said Miss Devere. “I can do it. I 
am going to do it. If you have the grit, I can pro- 
vide the training. What do you say?" 

“I move that we do whatever Miss Devere says,'’ 
Beau said. 

“I second the motion," Wistaria said. 

“And the motion is carried," Miss Devere summed 
up. 

The others shook their heads in doubt and talked 
of rainbows again. 


122 


The Boy Who Came Back 


CHAPTER XIX 

A COWARD 

M ISS DEVERE, for all her gentle ways, seemed 
to be determined, formed all her plans on the 
spot, pointed out the need which the parish 
had of raising money, the duty of all good Catholics 
to help in the work, the joy which Father Sherwood 
would feel at their success, the power of their ex- 
ample, and the necessity of forgetting themselves a 
little for the sake of the good accomplished. 

'T have had long experience,’' said she, “in train- 
ing young people for stage performances. I feel sure 
that we shall give a very entertaining show. All that 
I need is industry on your part, and one or two more 
young men to complete our company. Now whom 
can you recommend?” 

“Charlie Haven lives upstairs,” said Beau with a 
sly glance at his brother, “and he sings and dances 
around the house as well as any one.” 

“He’d be a good singer but for his voice and a good 
dancer but for his feet,” Lafayette replied sourly. 
“Don’t you like him?” said Miss Devere. 

“I ought to, for he’s been good to me,” the lad 
answered. 

“Loaned him all his clothes and jewelry,” Beau put 
it. 

“Then ask him in right away,” Miss Devere com- 
manded, and Beau rushed out to see if Charlie was 
at home, delighted to irritate his brother. 

“Why do you dislike him?” Miss Devere asked. 

“I don’t think I do. Miss Devere. Of course, he 
has ways I don’t like. He’s stuck up a little, and he 
makes me think of baby-blue ribbons and cologne and 
kid gloves and things like that.” 


A Coward 


123 


Regina thfew up her hands in despair. 

‘‘But he’s good and kind,” the lad went on, "‘and he’s 
certainly been good to me. I have no objection, and 
he will do better than I can ever do on the stage. 
Gee, Miss Devere, I never could have the cheek to 
get up before a Ferry audience and do stunts like 
actors.” 

‘'Trust me, Lafayette. If I find that you are not 
able to do stunts like actors I’ll make you stage man- 
ager. You will trust me, won’t you?” 

“Anything you say goes,” he answered heartily. 

Charlie Haven accepted a place in the company 
with joy. His secret ambition had been to appear 
on the stage, not as a regular actor, but as an amateur. 
He was too nervous to appear in public even at school, 
and always declined the service ; but how he did envy 
the boys and girls who had the courage to speak, act, 
or sing, before an audience, how he would have taken 
pride in the ability to sing and dance in public ! Miss 
Devere promptly discovered his longing, and felt that 
she had good material to work upon. So it was all 
arranged there and then. What a happy evening they 
passed, going over the things which they had practised 
in secret, so that Miss Devere might judge of their 
capacity! She praised them to the skies, and to give 
them confidence in her she gave examples of her own 
skill and talent. She told them the story of Lady 
Macbeth and gave them the sleep-walking scene with 
the lights turned down, with such effect that Wistaria 
wept and Lafayette felt cold chills in his back. Finally 
she took it on herself to visit Father Sherwood and 
obtain his permission to give the entertainment at his 
convenience. When she explained her intentions to 
the priest he thanked her heartily. 

“At the same time,” he said, “I do not feel too sure 
that you can do much with that company. What will 
you do?” 


124 


The Boy Who Came Back 


‘That is to remain a profound secret/’ said Miss 
Devere. “But really they are the cleverest children I 
have ever met. Wistaria has great talent. Regina 
by her very appearance would impress an audience. 
The two boys are originals. And Charlie Haven is 
the most willing pupil I have ever had.” 

“You seem to be interested in the family then?” 

“Who could help it? It is most refreshing to listen 
to them, to watch them. They are children of nature.” 

“Very much so,” the priest said dryly. “Do you 
really think you can give a two hours’ entertainment 
with them?” 

“Wait and see. No one is to know what the show 
will be until the bills are printed. I wish to surprise 
you by the talent of your own people.” 

“Oh, the talent is in the Ferry,” he answered, “but 
the discipline is lacking. They won’t train, won’t 
learn parts, won’t attend rehearsals, and they are 
afraid of criticism, which is often unjust and generally 
of no account. But it burns just the same.” 

“It will not this time,” Miss Devere said positively. 

So no one knew what was happening until the bills 
were printed, informing the public that Miss Paula 
Devere and her company would present a lively farce 
in the town hall on the evening of July 28th for the 
benefit of the parish. After the performance straw- 
berries and cream would be sold for the same purpose. 
Charlie and Lafayette distributed the bills in the va- 
rious stores. 

“And if they knew the company,” said one to the 
other, “they would buy all the old eggs in town for 
the performance.” 

“Except the Queen,” said Lafayette. 

“And a few others,” Charlie replied. “But for me 
my feet are cold as ice right here and now, and if I 
open my mouth at all that night, before all those 
people, it will be just before I faint dead away.” 


A Coward 


125 


‘‘As long as I have the Queen to back me/’ said the 
other, “I am ready to face any crowd on earth. If she 
says we can do it, we do it, that’s all, and the mob 
may say what they please.” 

“Easy to talk, Mr. Lawton, but when the time 
comes you may be dumb.” 

Lafayette looked at Charlie with some contempt, 
feeling that he had already begun to show the white 
feather. 

“When the time comes I’ll be there with my voice 
and my mind and my boots on,” he answered. “But 
do you look out, kid, that your cold feet don’t get 
paralyzed about curtain time, and wreck the show. If 
ever you did a thing like that, there would be some- 
thing doing.” 

“Not from you,” said Charlie shortly. 

“Maybe you want me to begin now?” 

“Suit yourself. There’s more than one way to 
wreck the show.” 

Lafayette had a shock. He found himself doing 
the very thing of which he had just accused the other, 
and he checked the evil spirit at once. Charlie also 
remembered his understanding with the priest, and 
smiled affably at his companion, who did not like that 
smile. They changed the subject, however. 

Everything went smoothly until the very evening 
of the entertainment. After tea at six they had 
a final rehearsal in the parlor, to polish up the darker 
parts, and Miss Devere pronounced herself completely 
satisfied. The show would make a pleasant impression 
on any audience. The little company, encouraged by 
the praise and confidence of the directress, bustled 
about to get their traps together. Only Charlie Haven 
had a miserable, strained, pallid face, but he did not 
complain. They set out for the town-hall together, 
no one noticing that Charlie remained behind until 
they had arrived in the dressing-room. The town- 


126 


The Boy Who Came Back 


hall of Silver Ferry was never intended for entertain- 
ment. It was small and stuffy, dusty and ill-lighted, 
with one dressing-room and a wretched stage, half 
the size of an ordinary room. The company had 
dressed at home and simply sat in the dressing-room. 
They waited till eight o’clock for Charlie Haven and 
then began to get anxious. 

'T had better go after him,” said Lafayette. 'T’ll 
bet he’s in the ice chest. He told me he was worrying 
about this thing.” 

“You mean he had an attack of stage fright?” asked 
Miss Devere. 

“He was afraid all right,” replied the boy. 

“Well, I think Beau had better go after him, or 
perhaps I had better go myself. Stage fright is a 
queer thing, and acts very badly at times. I know, 
because I have had it myself.” 

“You! You afraid, Miss Devere!” 

“Not afraid, Lafayette. No, no, not that. Stage 
fright is something quite different. It’s a real sick- 
ness. It attacks the greatest actors and orators. 
There is no apparent reason for it, and any one may 
get it. Poor, dear Charlie ! If he was suffering from 
that this evening, he deserves to be pitied.” 

“Oh, gee!” was all the astonished boy could say to 
these statements. At that moment Charlie Haven 
entered the dressing-room, quite pale and worried, 
and ashamed. He had laid aside his costume, and 
Lafayette turned on him fiercely. 

“What do you mean by this?” he shouted. “Are 
you going to break up the show? Where’s your cos- 
tume? Get it on. It’s after eight.” 

“Fm not going to play,” Charlie answered firmly. 

“Just as I thought, a coward!” snapped the other. 

There was a little silence of terror in the room, 
while the company looked at the unfortunate Charlie, 
who seemed dazed and yet sensible. Miss Devere 


A Coward 


127 


said nothing, and did not appear to be disturbed. She 
left discussion to the two boys. Lafayette advanced 
with clenched fists on Charlie, and shouted the last 
word in his face. 

‘‘Lm not going to play,” said Charlie, ‘'just because 
I’ll spoil the show. I felt it all along. I’m not fit 
to play before a crowd. Look at me shake.” And he 
held out his hands with a sickly smile. 

“I remember the first time I went on the stage,” 
said Miss Devere, “and I not only trembled and shook 
till my knees bent under me, but I got sick to my 
stomach as well, and had an awful time. But I went 
out just the same. You see no matter how nervous 
you feel beforehand it wears off after you get before 
the people, and you warm up and feel quite pleasant 
after a while.” 

She kept on speaking for some time in her easy 
way, with her bright eyes fixed on Charlie’s face, 
telling of great men who had suffered from stage 
fright and had overcome it; and while she spoke the 
children gathered quietly about the lad, patting his 
hands and whispering warm words; until finally he 
found his courage coming back, and also the strength 
to put on his costume. The music had begun to play, 
and the chatter of the audience could be heard. Al- 
most before he knew it the curtain had slipped back 
and Charlie found himself in the glare of the foot- 
lights, talking as naturally as if he had rehearsed in 
the parlor. 

“The Queen wins every time!” was the comment 
of Lafayette off stage. 


128 


The Boy Who Came Back 


CHAPTER XX 

A WARNING 

T he Ferry people who made up the audience had 
come there, not to enjoy the show, nor out of 
curiosity, but just to help the church and to 
please Father Sherwood. They did not know Miss 
Devere and if they had learned that the Lawton family 
were to be the chief entertainers they would have 
stayed at home even after buying their tickets. They 
could never be made to believe that clever people lived 
in Silver Ferry, and that the Lawtons were full of 
cleverness. They lived very much like oysters, each 
in his own little shell, comfortable, sleepy, happy, 
good-natured, and silent. They often wondered why 
Father Sherwood kept crying to them, ‘Wake up!’' 
So happy were they that they did not know they 
were most of the time sound asleep. When the curtain 
went up they did not expect very much entertainment, 
and they did not care whether they got it. Father 
Sherwood sat in the first row near the stage. He was 
quite curious to see what Miss Devere had done with 
the wild Lawton children. 

The scene showed an office in which sat Miss 
Devere. She represented a woman manager who trav- 
elled about the country towns with a small company 
of clever people giving church and school entertain- 
ments. She called her players by the general name 
of The Sheridan Family, although the members were 
not related. She was now making a selection of 
players for the coming season, and sat in her office 
waiting for applicants. Imagine the astonishment of 
Father Sherwood and the Ferry people when Mrs. 
Lawton walked in on the stage to offer her entire 
family to the service of Miss Devere. Mamma Law^ 


A Warning 


129 


ton had done washing so long that people had for- 
gotten, or had never known, that in her youth she had 
been a charming and talented girl. Few indeed recog- 
nized in the well-dressed woman with the clear voice 
and easy manner the lady of the washtub. She had a 
lively chat with Miss Devere on the merits of her 
family and the price of their services. She demanded 
a high price and all sorts of privileges, and of course 
Miss Devere asked to see each member of the family 
and to pass on their performance. 

Wistaria was first brought in as the child who 
could play the part of a doll. Amid much laughter 
two boys carried the child into the office, done up in a 
large paper-box, her little figure wrapped in tissue 
paper. The box was stood on end, Mrs. Lawton 
undid the wrappings, carefully lifted out the doll and 
stood her facing the audience. Oh, what a pretty 
sight Wistaria made! She had the red cheeks and 
violet eyes and golden hair and blue and white clothes 
of the doll, and looked just like one, so that the chil- 
dren cried out, ‘‘Oh, what a big doll V* She stood as 
still as wood, with staring eyes that saw nothing. 
Then at the command of her mother she winked her 
eyes, and bowed her head, and answered questions, 
and danced stiffly, and squeaked a doll song, until the 
Ferry people were screaming with laughter. They had 
never seen so queer a sight before. When they had 
begun to think she was a real doll, Wistaria dropped 
the trick and proceeded to sing and dance like a real 
child, in the prettiest Vv^ay, so that the people woke up 
and said to one another. What a clever child: she 
must be a real actress: where does she come from? 
They would hardly believe that this was Wistaria 
Lawton, whose mother took in washing. So they 
applauded and encored until Miss Devere shut them 
off by engaging the child for her company. 

Then Beau was introduced as The Electric Boy. 


130 


The Boy Who Came Back 


He had a wig of bushy black hair like a Zulu, a green 
face, and heavy eyebrows. His clothes were over large 
and full of buttons. He stood in silence while his 
mother described his abilities. He winked at the chil- 
dren, and an electric light flashed in his eye. He 
yawned and a light shone in his mouth. He scratched 
his leg and a light flashed at the spot. He began to 
unbutton his coat, and every button flashed and shone. 
He danced a wild war-dance at his mother’s command, 
and his whole body broke out into electric lights, which 
came and went like fire-flies. If you put your finger 
on him he flashed. If he put his finger on a tabfe 
or a chair, a light flashed there. How the children 
laughed, and how the people applauded ! He also was 
engaged at a large salary for The Sheridan Family. 

Then Regina was introduced as the girl with the 
bird-voice. Very few knew the strange power which 
she had to imitate precisely the warblings of all sorts 
of sweet-singing birds. Regina was a shy girl, and 
did not parade her good qualities. Now she aston- 
ished every one with imitations of birds. The music 
was not made with the lips, helped by peculiar whistles, 
but by the throat, exactly as a bird makes music. She 
sang songs which required imitations of birds, and 
Miss Devere had hard work to quiet the applause and 
to let Regina go, after engaging her at a large sum 
for her touring company. 

Last of all came the comedians, introduced by Mrs. 
Lawton as The Siamese Twins, whom she had picked 
up in Siam many years after Mr. Barnum had intro- 
duced his famous pair to the circus of America. 
Thereupon Lafayette and Charlie entered, dressed as 
Chinese, with yellow skins, pointed eyebrows, pigtails 
and loose garments. A long Bologna sausage held 
them together. They came in dancing a ridiculous 
dance in exact steps, singing strange words, and shak- 
ing their hands like flippers. At Mamma’s bidding 


A Warning 


131 

they spoke and sang Siamese, of a terrible kind, and 
did so many funny things that the Ferry people got 
tired of laughing. Miss Devere had a suspicion as to 
their character, and before engaging them she slyly 
examined the sausage and cut it in twain. The Twins 
went right on acting, ignorant of what she had done, 
and thus gave themselves away. However, they were 
hired at reduced rates to entertain in The Sheridan 
Family. 

The show closed with a chorus and dance by the 
company. Miss Devere in the lead, and amid the loud 
applause and laughter of the audience. As they stood 
on the stage after the applause died away. Miss Devere 
complimented them warmly. 

“I knew you were going to do well,’" said she, ‘‘but 
I never dreamed you would be able to impress a cold 
audience so finely. It was simply perfect. Fve paid 
money to see poorer entertainment.’' 

Then she named each one in her kindly way, and 
Charlie Haven last of all, thanking them for their 
good work and their success. 

“Charlie deserves more praise than any other,” she 
continued, “because he overcame that fearsome thing 
known as stage fright.” 

Charlie looked straight ahead at nothing, for he 
was very much ashamed of his backdown, while La- 
fayette gave him a glance with something of a threat 
in it; and of course both Miss Devere and Beau saw 
it and took profit by it. 

“No one knov/s what it is to suffer from stage fright 
but he who has had it,” the lady continued. “The 
greatest statesmen and actors and musicians, and all 
those who appear before the public to teach or to en- 
tertain, have suffered from it. Some gave up public 
life on account of it. Others conquered it. Charlie 
conquered it. Therefore to him the highest praise.” 

Then Father Sherwood came in to add his praises 


132 


The Boy Who Came Back 


and compliments, and above all to congratulate Miss 
Devere on her success with the Lawtons. 

‘‘It will be a lesson to the people here,” said he. 
“They do not believe that they can do anything and 
they do not believe others can. Least of all would 
they have believed that the Lawton castaways could 
entertain so cleverly. Now they have something to 
think about, to make them think. To you the 
praise.” 

The ladies went home together, the boys remained 
behind to gather up costumes and properties. Beau 
sniffed sport between his brother and his friend, and 
he was eager to help it along. Lafayette was choked 
with anger in spite of the evening’s success. He said 
to himself that his anger came from the cowardly be- 
havior of Charlie Haven that night. To think of a 
human being stooping to such meanness just sickened 
him. Good, kind Miss Devere, like the Queen she 
was, had found him an excuse in stage fright, but 
he was not going to get away so easily. He himself 
would see to it before the evening was over that 
Charlie received his share of opprobrium. They went 
home in silence along the back street. Beau chattered 
like a monkey in the hope of seeing a fight. He asked 
Charlie if he really meant to break up the show. He 
charged his brother with having stage fright too. He 
reported what certain people in the audience had said 
about the acting of the Siamese Twins; how much 
better Charlie was than Lafe: how poor were both: 
who induced them to go on the stage: what jail should 
hold the inducer : and so on in Beau’s best style. Th'e 
boys did not heed him. Charlie was wondering sadly 
if he could ever get nerve enough to go on again. 
Lafe was seeking a place of attack, but did not wish 
to go too far. 

“That was a dirty trick you played on the Queen 
to-night,” he said at last. 


A Warning 


133 


'"It was no trick, just stage fright; didn’t you hear 
her say so?” Beau chirped up with his sneering 
laugh. 

“It doesn’t matter much now,” Charlie replied in 
his easy way. “I got over it. The show was a suc- 
cess. Miss Devere is satisfied. So is Father Sher- 
wood. And I go on the stage no more.” 

“You’ll have it all to yourself, Lafe,” said Beau, 
“and that’s what you like, because you’re so jealous, 
you know. Don’t say you aren’t. You know you are. 
You’re jealous of me. You’re jealous of Charlie be- 
cause the Queen likes him better’n she likes you.” 

Beau dodged the hand aimed at his jaw and fled 
laughing into the house. Lafayette was in a rage. 
That easy way of Charlie’s, which showed his sense 
of superiority, always maddened him. Here he was 
lording it over him, the coward looking down on the 
man who had stuck to his post. 

“You ought to apologize to Miss Devere,” he said. 

“She did it for me. Anyway, I’ve seen the last of 
the stage.” 

“Good thing for the stage, and for the people that 
put on shows.” 

“You’ve said it,” Charlie replied. “There are also 
others.” 

“I could no more have acted as you acted to-nighl 
than I could fly,” Lafe went on. “If I had to die in 
my tracks I’d have gone on and made some sort of a 
bluff at my part. But to walk right in at the last 
minute, and tell us you were going to break up the 
show, why it beat anything I ever saw.” 

“It was better than running away and hiding in the 
cellar, wasn’t it? I gave Miss Devere a chance to get 
along somehow, didn’t I? After all, it would only 
mean that our sketch was dropped. I think we 
wouldn’t have been much missed. You seem to like 
rubbing it into a fellow. I’m not proud of my stage 


134 


The Boy Who Came Back 


fright, and I’m not proud of my acting. Perhaps you 
think you’re an actor.” 

Lafayette laid a heavy hand on Charlie’s collar, 
swung him around so as to look into his face, and 
was just about to say and to do regrettable things 
when the voice of the Queen came sweetly from the 
veranda. 

“We’re waiting for you in the kitchen with cake 
and ice cream.” 

The two broke away and went forward hastily. 
Lafayette carried his bundle inside, while Miss Devere 
delayed a minute to chat with Charlie. 

“Do you know that we forgot one thing in your 
sketch?” said she. “The Twins should have had a 
boxing match. Do you know how to box, Charlie?” 

“No, ma’am, and I don’t think I ever shall.” 

“Science often makes up for lack of strength,” said 
she. “To box and to wrestle in the best fashion makes 
the gentleman as strong as the bully. What do you 
think ?” 

“I understand,” said Charlie, “and I’ll follow your 
advice.” 


CHAPTER XXI 

GOING DOWN 

L afayette never missed his task of getting 
j breakfast for Regina, with whom he liked to have 
a morning chat in the quiet of the kitchen. Both 
had to get away to work early, and this hour was all 
their own. He was a rather conceited boy the morn- 
ing after the show. As a dancer and comedian he had 
been a success, but the success of the entire family 
was a much greater thing. 

“Now you see what we got from following Father 


Going Down 


135 


Sherwood’s advice,” said he to Regina. ‘‘Here we 
are this fine summer morning all shining with glory. 
If you had been obstinate, and so on, where would 
we all be now? I’d be on the road and the children 
in the Home. You’d be in the city and Mamma at 
the washtub.” 

“Thank you, but don’t forget it was Father Sher- 
wood and Miss Devere that did it. Take them away 
and what would we be? We’re lucky to have such 
help. Now it’s different with people like the Havens. 
No matter who comes or goes they are always the 
same respectable people.” 

“Charlie was a nice respectable boy last night, 
wasn’t he?” 

“Oh, that may happen to you too. Stage fright is 
an awful thing. And by the way, don’t get too proud 
because he made a break and you didn’t. You have 
about two hundred breaks to his one. And go easy 
with Beau.” 

“Why should I? Beau’s bad, and Charlie’s a 
coward.” 

“You are not worthy to be his valet,” she replied in 
her smiling way. “But what we want now is peace 
and order for a year.” 

“Well, I’m going to keep Beau in his place and teach 
Mr. Haven a lesson.” 

“Oh, you are, are you? You are to become a 
teacher, are you? See how it is,” and she shook her 
finger at him. “Just as soon as good people like Father 
Sherwood and Miss Devere drag us up from our 
low level by hard work, we begin to go down again. 
You are going to fight with Charlie Haven, after bor- 
rowing his clothes and his jewelry, and you are going 
to beat Beau because he is so much like what you were. 
Now let me tell you this: I’m going to keep a room 
at Mrs. Crew’s boarding-house, and I’ll drop in there 
for good the moment you begin your capers. Last 


136 The Boy Who Came Back 

night was great for the Lawtons, too great, too good 
to be lasting/’ 

Lafayette was shocked, but he was bound not to be 
depressed. 

''You’re right. Miss Lawton, we are in danger of 
going down again, and I see it,” said he. "But I’m 
going to fight it. We shan’t go down if I can help it.” 

"Then mend your ways and keep an eye on them,” 
said Regina. 

In spite of this alarm, matters went very well for 
a long while. Miss Devere took up the task of pre- 
paring Wistaria and Beau for their first confession 
and communion, and had the entire household inter- 
ested in the event. Wistaria in a few weeks had be- 
come a charming little girl, of rare gifts, under the 
fostering care of Miss Devere. All her oddity and wil- 
fulness seemed to disappear, and Beau found it im- 
possible to interest her in his schemes. He was talk- 
ing another runaway to the far West, with railroad 
tickets and money. He would need fifty dollars to get 
them to Chicago and board them a week while they 
looked for work. Wistaria laughed at his rainbows. 
She was safely anchored beside Miss Devere, who 
trained her in singing and speaking, and besides she 
had had enough of one runaway. Beau saw that he 
would have to run away alone, or take some one 
from the Ferry along. When Miss Devere mentioned 
first confession and communion he demurred. 

"I don’t intend to be a Catholic when I grow up, 
any more than now,” said he, "so what’s the use of 
confession and communion?” 

"But you’re a Catholic now,” said the lady, "and 
all your family, and of course you wish to be like 
them.” 

"No I don’t. I never was like them, and I never 
shall be. I’m not like them, am I?” 

She looked at the wise old face of the lad and con- 


Going Down 


137 


sidered. While she thought, Beau took a long look 
at her diamond ring, and a thought entered his head. 

‘‘Are diamonds very expensive?’' he asked. 

“Very, according to size. This ring is worth about 
one hundred dollars. It cost more.” 

She took it off and placed it in his hand. He. ex- 
amined it with pleasure, while she studied his be- 
havior. Regina in confidence had told her of recent 
events in the Lawton family, of Beau’s precocious and 
well-planned wickedness, of his indifference to sin, 
and other things. The boy seemed to have no con- 
science. How could he be waked to a sense of his 
condition ? 

“Could you really sell that for one hundred dol- 
lars?” said Beau, after a long handling of the precious 
stone. Miss Devere talked with him about his knowl- 
edge of the catechism, but he knew only what he had 
picked up in conversation. He had always resisted 
instruction and he simply ignored Miss Devere now, 
answering her questions with nonsense and refusing to 
be coaxed into preparation of any kind. 

Father Sherwood being duly informed, recom- 
mended the intervention of Lafayette. This was 
brought about by Mamma herself. Having pleaded 
in her weak way with Beau she made her complaint 
to the elder lad, who began to jibe him. 

“There’s a vacant lot in your head, Beau, and you 
want to build on it,” said he. “It’s so full of old 
rags and bottles that it looks bad. Put up a fine villa 
on it. Don’t leave it to the ragmen.” 

Beau could not stand ridicule, fond as he was of 
ridiculing others, and he knew that if Lafayette took 
a hand in the game he would simply have to learn the 
catechism at the end of a stick. Miss Devere shook 
her head at Lafayette, meaning that ridicule was not 
a good means of persuasion, but the lad replied : 

“Miss Devere, you don’t know this chap as I do. 


138 The Boy Who Came Back 

He’s a very good boy when he feels like it. He’s 
also a very good boy when I order him to be good. 
He can’t stand being thumped. Now I’m going to 
order him to learn his catechism and to prepare for 
his first confession and first communion, and he’ll 
obey just like the seals in the circus. Beau, bring 
your catechism here.” 

With a grin the boy found a dog-eared book and 
handed it to Lafe with a bow. 

“Beau, you will learn two chapters of this book 
every day and recite them to Miss Devere, who is 
willing to take this awful job. It’s worse than run- 
ning the street-cleaning department. But she doesn’t 
mind, as Queen of the Lawtons.” 

“What a lovely title!” said she, quite embarrassed 
by this speech, but Beau did not mind it a bit. 

“You will go to confession and to communion at 
the time appointed,” Lafayette continued. “You 
have a good brain, but it’s full of slush. Maybe the 
wise words of the catechism, and the steering of Miss 
Devere will clean it up.” 

After that there was no further trouble. Beau had 
a quick mind and a good memory, he liked the prob- 
lems which grew out of ordinary statements, and he 
soon confused his teacher by his questions on the 
mystery of the Trinity, and all the other difficulties 
that came up in the study of the catechism. He found 
himself the centre of interest in the family for the 
time being. Regina suggested that all the Lawtons 
and their immediate friends should go to communion 
on the same day and have a little breakfast afterward. 
Miss Devere undertook the arrangements. New 
clothes had to be bought for the children, which 
pleased Beau very much, as he was just then gather- 
ing his wardrobe for the trip to the West. Little gifts 
came showering in on him and Wistaria, medals and 
pictures and rosaries and prayer books, and made 


Going Down 


139 


first communion much more pleasant than he had 
dreamed it could be. Charlie Haven took him up to 
his room one evening and gave him his choice of any 
one thing in his jewelry collection. 

‘‘Of course he’ll take the best thing in the bunch,” 
Lafe said as a warning, and with a mocking grin 
Beau did. Looking around, Lafe saw a pair of boxing 
gloves hanging on the wall. 

“Are you going into the ring?” he asked. 

“If you will give me some lessons,” Charlie 
answered. “Every one knows you are good at box- 
ing.” 

“Sure I’ll give you lessons,” said Lafe as he put 
on the gloves and struck an attitude. Charlie followed 
his example and Beau had the satisfaction of being 
referee and deciding against his brother every time, 
besides awarding all the points to the pupil instead of 
the teacher. 

“My, but he is crooked,’^ Lafayette said in disgust. 
“What the Catholic Church, backed by Father Sher- 
wood and the Queen, can ever make out of such 
crookedness, I don’t see.” 

Neither did Miss Devere, who had no trouble with 
the gentle but eccentric Wistaria, but who failed to 
sound the depths of Beau’s shamming. He followed 
directions as if his brother were on guard over him, 
he asked more questions than the teacher could answer, 
he proposed more difficulties than a professor could 
settle, and all the time Miss Devere had a feeling that 
the matter never touched his heart. In the lesson on 
how to make a confession, he said, 

“I don’t know what sins I have to tell. What shall 
I tell the priest, Wis ?” 

“Do you want me to make your confession for 
you?” 

“Why not, if you know my sins better than I do?” 

“Tell how you ran away from home, played hookey 


140 The Boy Who Came Back 

from school, told a hundred thousand lies to Mamma 
and the rest of us, and stole a bicycle,” said Wistaria. 

“And are those sins. Miss Devere?” 

“Tell how you never went to church or catechism, 
how you stole fruit in the store, and books out of the 
library, and papers off the news-stand. Well, I guess 
Father Sherwood ’ll have to take a whole evening to 
hear you.” 

“And how about yourself. Miss Innocent?” 

“I’m going in the morning, and get through before 
dinner. You’d better start in the day before.” 

“Couldn’t you do it for us both, Wis?” 

But Wistaria declined to discuss the question, and 
the lesson went on to Miss Devere’s astonishment. 
Beau wrote out on paper all the sins of his life, and 
asked her opinion of the arrangement and number. 

“Do you think that will satisfy the priest?” he 
asked. 

“I think so,” she answered gravely. 

Everything went off nicely. The confessions were 
heard without trouble, the new clothes were tried on, 
the medals and ribbons were pinned in the right places, 
and Lafayette showed them how to carry their can- 
dles. The house was very quiet that night so as not 
to disturb their recollection, and the morning very 
decorous. Wistaria looked like an angel. But she 
had to go to the altar unaccompanied by her brother. 
At the last moment, as they were leaving the house. 
Beau thoughtlessly popped a cream chocolate into his 
mouth and chewed it with great satisfaction. Wis- 
taria screamed, but it was too late. He spat out what 
was left, but he had swallowed the greater part, his 
fast was broken, and he shed a few tears. 

“Never mind. Wistaria,” said he. I’ll keep looking 
at you the whole time, and to-morrow I’ll make my 
first communion.” 


The ' Lawn Party 


141 


CHAPTER XXII 


THE LAWN PARTY 


TW TEITHER to-morrow nor the next day nor 
the next week did Beau make his first com- 
munion. He answered no questions on the 
subject except to refer the curious to Father Sher- 
wood. The priest had a private talk with Beau that 
week, of which nothing ever was known. The family 
were requested to drop the matter, and to leave it to 
Beau himself when he should make his first acquaint- 
ance with the Lord of the Eucharist. Lafayette looked 
at him with terrible eyes, but he could not disobey 'the 
orders of the priest; the other members of the family 
pleaded with the lad, but he kept a stubborn silence. 

“It’s just what I have said all along, he’s a crook,” 
Lafayette remarked to Regina. “He has made up his 
mind to live that way. He’s no Catholic. The priest 
has found that out, and is just leaving it to time to 
change him. But he’ll never change.” 

“Nor any other Lawton,” said Regina sadly. “I 
had a look at the boarding-house the other day. I 
feel that I shall be there before the year is over. 
Miss Devere is holding us up, but when she goes or 
gets tired of it all the Lawtons will go down with a 
crash.” 

“You are encouraging, Miss Lawton,” said he, 
banging the table with his fist. “But let me tell you 
that no matter who comes or goes I’m going to hold 
up the Lawton family myself.” 

Certainly the family had now a good start in life. 
Their reputation for cleverness and gentility had 
spread, they had money coming in sufficient for their 
wants, and they were able to dress well. Lafayette 
was more than ever determined to make their stand- 


142 


The Boy Who Came Back 


ing sure, and to overcome the gloomy feelings of 
Regina, and he seized every chance that offered. He 
sought the society of the best boys in town, and 
avoided the others. He asked Father Sherwood for 
permission to carry the collection basket on Sunday 
mornings for the side aisle, and felt like a lord as he 
swung up and down before the wondering congrega- 
tion. He accepted the post of assistant librarian, and 
joined the Holy Name Society. He was like a soldier 
on the frontier, building up new defences every day, 
strengthening the old ones, getting ready for the at- 
tack of the enemy. Regina and Miss Devere watched 
all these labors with great satisfaction. Little by 
little Lafayette was training himself for the position of 
head of the family. 

The annual lawn party for the benefit of the church 
happened that year in August. It was a great occa- 
sion for the young people. A large platform was 
erected for dancing, and a small one for jigs and reels 
and hornpipes. A third platform provided a stage for 
speakers and singers. Beside it stood the whipstand, 
where men threw little rings at a pole, and won a 
whip or a cane if the rings fell on the pole. The ladies 
sold ice cream and cake in one place, the men sold soft 
drinks at another, and at a third one could buy a fine 
lunch of sandwiches and clam chowder. With the 
band playing on the platform, and the children racing 
about, on a sunny afternoon, it looked very much like 
a small circus ground with the animals left out. Every 
one enjoyed it, and all the boys longed to have charge 
of the whipstand. Lafayette had taken a good taste 
of public life as a collector and a librarian, and he 
determined now to shine as the manager of the whip- 
stand. He laid his plans quietly for a soft appeal fo 
Father Sherwood, but the priest informed him that 
Charlie Haven had secured the job two months ago. 

‘‘But since you are so kind and willing to help,” said 


The Lawn Party 143 

Father Sherwood, ''you can assist the ladies at the 
lemonade stand.” 

And he had to accept the thankless office of handing 
out lemonade to the children, in order to keep up his 
show of generosity. What looks he cast at Charlie, 
in his best clothes, leading a gentleman’s life at the 
whipstand, calling out his inducements, joking with 
every one, raking in the nickels, and looking like a 
sunbeam ! Beau helped his rage along by grinning at 
him as he ladled out the lemonade, and by significant 
gestures towards Charlie. What happened he really 
did not intend. 

"Come in and give us a hand for a while,” said he 
to Beau, "and I’ll go play the whipstand. I can show 
them how to throw the rings.” 

Beau would have declined promptly but for the 
thought that his brother v^ould start a fight with 
Charlie Haven. So he crawled behind the lemonade 
stand, rolled up his sleeves, seized the ladle, and leaned 
over the tub of lemonade. Lafayette with his tricky 
toe pulled his foot from under him as he himself 
rushed to the whipstand, and Beau went head first 
into the lemonade. His brother did not see the result 
of the trip. Beau himself did not know what tripped 
him, no one had seen the trick, and the lad was simply 
berated for his awkwardness, and sent home to change 
his clothes. 

At a certain hour the stage performance began and 
the first number was a boxing match between two 
young men of local fame. They sent word at the last 
moment that they would not appear, and Father 
Sherwood seemed to feel so keenly the disappointment 
that Charlie Haven, ever watchful of his friend’s 
feelings, suggested to Lafayette that they take the 
place of the laggards. 

"Why, you wouldn’t appear before all these people 
to box,” said the other. "In the first place you don’t 


144 Came Back. 

know how to box, and then you might get stage, 
fright/' 

“Fm your pupil," said Charlie, ignoring the slight- 
ing words, '‘and you will know how to make it look' 
as if I was nearly as good as you. Anything to help 
Father Sherwood out of trouble." 

“Right you are," said Lafe. 

In a few minutes they were on the stage, in sweat- 
ers, with seconds and referee, to give the bout distinc- 
tion. The crowd gathered around the place, and be- 
gan their usual good-natured gibes at the contestants. 
Charlie seemed indifferent to the comments passed on 
his leanness, and to the advice given him to run while 
the running was good. Lafayette gave him the 
proper instructions for each round, as from master 
to pupil, and successfully resisted a temptation to get 
even with him for their past differences. It would 
have been easy for him to beat Charlie in five minutes, 
to disgrace him before the crowd, and to punch him 
badly without knocking him out. But he felt the 
meanness of treating his own pupil in that fashion, 
and put the thought aside. The contest began. While 
every one saw that Charlie was not in the same class 
with his teacher, it was also noticed that he put up a 
neat defence. As a matter of fact, Charlie had taken 
Miss Devere's advice very much to heart, and had 
gone secretly to a boxing master and taken a course 
of lessons and practice. It disgusted Lafayette very 
much in the second round to learn that his pupil 
yielded very little to his most skillful and spirited at- 
tacks. He seemed to yield. He was winded at times. 
But beyond a certain point Lafayette was not able 
to force him. It struck him after the second round, 
while they were resting, that this Charlie Haven had 
always been a much cleverer boy than himself. What 
if in the matter of boxing he was simply fooling him. 


The Lawn Part^ 


145 


the teacher, and laughing at him in his sleeve? In 
fact, his second whispered to him a warning that 
Charlie might be keeping back his strength for the 
third and last round. The blood in his body flew to 
his head. He went into the third round with the 
wicked resolve to punish Charlie there and then for 
all their differences, and to make him feel for days 
the superior strength and skill of himself. It was 
surely a smashing round. All his skill and strength 
and fury went into it. He drove Charlie all about 
the stage, he hammered at him, rushed him, used every 
device to lay him low, to make him sore. The crowd 
cheered and laughed as the crowd always does: but 
the end came and there stood Charlie, breathing hard, 
but erect, laughing, triumphant. He had held his own 
before the best boxer of his age in the town, and the 
crowd understood and applauded. Charlie bowed and 
jumped back to his whipstand. The crowd ridiculed 
Lafayette, for the knowing ones easily discovered his 
intention to knock Charlie out, saw how he had failed. 
If it were not that Father Sherwood patted his back, 
and told him how fine a boxer he had made out of 
Charlie Haven, and taken him over for a glass of 
soda, he would have gone home and disciplined Beau 
before he got rid of his lemonade moisture. He be- 
came cheerful again, and went around looking for 
friends. The grounds were becoming crowded and 
athletic events were preparing. Among them was a 
mile race, and what was his surprise to see the name 
of Charlie Haven entered for it. 

*Tf he can run a mile I can,” he said sneeringly to 
another. 

"‘Well, sonny,” said the other, “Fm not placing 
Charlie for first, because there’s another who can and 
will beat him. But if you run against him I’ll stake 
a few dollars that he beats you a half mile, or more.” 


146 


The Boy Who Came Back 


Oh, the sting of those last words! 

'‘I have no money, and Fve had no training,'’ Lafe 
answered, *‘but if you will take my promise ” 

'‘I’ll take your promise for a dollar,” said the man, 
“and I’ll give you five dollars if you come in five 
hundred yards behind him.” 

“Done!” said Lafe, and he raced away to get his 
togs together, and to make what preparations were 
possible in a short time. He felt as sure of that money 
as if it were in his pocket. He knew it was no easy 
matter to run a mile, less easy to run against skilled 
runners, least easy to run without training; but if he 
could not run the wind out of Charlie Haven any 
minute then he must surely be a failure. So he turned 
up at the scratch beside Charlie and three others, re- 
fused to take any advantage of his pupil, and started 
on the line. Every one ran easily at the start, for a* 
mile is a long distance even for a dog trot. Lafayette 
simply jogged along beside Charlie to earn his five 
dollars. At first it seemed so easy. Then strange 
things began to happen. Charlie drew away from the 
four, and the four drew away from him, and Lafe’s 
wind began to leave him, and the second wind refused 
to come. At the half mile he lay down in the grass 
by the side of the road and wondered if his breath 
would ever come back to his struggling lungs. Ly- 
ing there he could see the end of the circle made by the 
runners over the rough roads, and Charlie Haven 
crossing the line victorious. Oh, what bitterness filled 
his heart, towards himself, Charlie Haven, and man- 
kind in general! Why, this boy had made a perfect 
fool of him ! He could box better than he knew, out- 
run him, and out-general him in anything ! Well, there 
were other lads in the Ferry who could do all that, and 
why should he feel bitter against Charlie and not 
against them ? He could not answer the question. He 
was sick of the Lawtons, sick of himself, sick of every- 


The Diamond Ring 


147 


thing. And as he rose to his feet rested, there stood 
the leader of the gang smiling. 

“YouVe no runner,’’ he said. ‘‘You’re trick is 
swimming. Come on down to the old joint and have 
a time. You don’t belong to that slow bunch yonder.” 
He waved his hand to the lawn party. 

“Where do I belong?” 

“To us, and you might as well come first as 
last.” 

“All right. I’ll think it over, but not now. Where’ll 
you be day after tomorrow ?” 

“In the cave. It’s there yet.” 

The chief seemed to know the moment was not 
quite ripe for persuasion, so they separated with 
mutual promises, and Lafayette went back to take the 
ridicule of the crowd, and to see Charlie in a kind of 
halo receive a gold medal from the hands of Father 
Sherwood. In his life he had never won such an 
honor. Strange, that these things should pass him by, 
him the muscular, well-built athlete, for the slim 
Charlie Haven. But the best man wins, and he ap- 
plauded with the rest, and hid his soreness for the 
time. 


CHAPTER XXIII 

THE DIAMOND RING 

N ever until the lawn party did Lafayette see as 
clearly what was wrong with him on the inside. 
As he expressed it, he was sore all over just 
because Charlie Haven had turned out a better man 
than he wanted him to be. 

“If I get sore,” he said to himself, “because this 
one and that one is better than I am, I stand a good 
chance of bad health all my life.” 


148 


The Boy Who Came Back 


Yet while he laughed at himself for his foolishness 
he carried the bitterness in his heart. He was willing 
to act mean and bad just for spite. He felt a kind of 
gladness in being mean to Charlie, who had been so 
kind to him. In fact, he determined to do the lad 
some harm. His good sense, his love for his home, 
and Regina and the priest, warned him against such 
feelings ; but he spurned them, because he could do as 
he pleased, and he would do as he pleased, and no one 
should stop him. This was precisely the way Beau 
thought and spoke and acted. Was he to be as mean 
and unprincipled as Beau? He looked into his inside 
as one looks into a deep well, surprised at what he 
saw in the darkness. There were crawling things there, 
vile things, whose sight and touch gave one the chills. 
Yet he continued to cherish them, to dwell upon them, 
to plan ways of humiliating Charlie, and he made faces 
when he saw his successful rival on the street. He was 
very much ashamed of this spirit, but still he indulged 
it. He had a feeling that he needed help from outside, 
but he was not going to ask for it. His mother noticed 
something strange about him. She herself had changed 
for the better, poor woman, under the gentle associa- 
tion with Miss Devere, so that she seemed very gentle 
and sweet compared with her wild brood of children. 

“When anything is wrong,” she said to Lafayette, 
“especially with your mind, always go to some wise 
person who can advise you.” 

“Then I come to you. Mamma,” he replied, “be- 
cause you are wiser on some things than any one I 
know.” 

“On washing and cooking, for instance,” said she. 
“But why not ask Miss Devere? What an angel of 
kindness she is ! How perfectly lovely she has made 
this house just by living in it! Why not speak to her 
in trouble ?” 

“I am sure I will, Mamma, if I need advice. But 


The Diamond Ring 149 

Fm all right, you know. Aren’t the Lawtons doing 
well at present?” 

am satisfied indeed. I have so little to do myself. 
But I can see, Lafe, that you are worried. Go and 
talk with Father Sherwood, the kind man.” 

But he did not go, for the simple reason that the 
tale would hardly be pleasing to the priest. However, 
Father Sherwood sent for him to make his regular 
report. All his clients and committees had to do that 
in the study, a cosy, comfortable place, where every- 
body loved to sit, where the obstinate grew soft, and 
the shy grew bold, and conversations ended in sweet- 
ness. Lafayette felt very uneasy this time, because he 
meant to conceal his miserable feelings, but he spoke 
up loud in answer to the first question about the family. 

‘‘All doing fine. Father,” said he, “except, of course, 
Beau, and you know more about his case than we do.” 

“I do. He must be left to himself until such time 
as I give the word. But is not your report a little too 
fine? How about Regina?” 

“Oh, she threatens to leave now and then. You see, 
she’s not a bit sure of us. It all seems too good to be 
true. The Lawton stock is away up in the market. So 
she keeps saying things to remind us that the road is 
slippery. But I’m on my guard all the time to keep 
from slipping.” 

“I think myself you are,” Father Sherwood said 
slowly, as if not so very sure. “You did a good job 
for Charlie Haven in the boxing.” 

A black frown settled on the boy’s face, but he 
pushed it back in time. 

“He is now nearly as good as I am.” 

“And how he has improved in weight and strength ! 
He owes it to you. Who would have believed he had 
wind for a mile race, and to win it ?” 

“It is very wonderful,” Lafayette admitted without 
any interest. 


150 The Boy Who Came Back 

“It struck me, though,” said the priest in his casual 
way, “that you seemed nettled in the boxing.” 

“Nettled! I was mad clear through, because he was 
so much better than I thought he had a right to be. I 
tried to smash him and get the laugh on him, but I 
got it on myself instead. Then I went into the race, 
just to show that I could beat him in anything. I 
made a fool of myself too.” 

“You certainly did,” the priest agreed, and the boy 
squirmed. “It was low-minded of you to begrudge 
Charlie the first victories that he ever won. You had 
your share in them, and you should have been proud 
of your pupil, not jealous.” 

Before Lafayette was aware of it Father Sherwood 
had the whole story of his inside trouble, and was pre- 
senting him with a close view of himself. He began 
to see that most of his troubles came from inside and 
not from outside. It was not so much Sam Cropsey 
and Lanky Bissell and the gang as it was himself. 

“You were very wild once,” the priest said, “and 
that made you reckless. Even now, when you want 
to do well and to be straight, you smash your own 
property. Charlie Haven is so glad that your training 
and example made him a man that he would do any- 
thing for you. Your wildness makes you jealous, and 
you try to injure him, and you do injure your own 
share in his victory and your proper reward for it.** 

“I suppose Beau has the same trouble,** Lafayette 
answered. “Because he can’t get what he wants the 
way he wants it, he kicks what he has to pieces.” 

“That is just the trouble. Now, do you make up 
to Charlie at once. Keep what you have, if it’s only 
a pin. Drive off trouble if you can, because enough 
will get in without your encouraging it. Hold on to 
your friends. They are scarce all the time. Close 
your gates, guard your walls, lay up supplies today, 
because tomorrow trouble may surround the fort. 


The Diamond Ring 


151 

Drive out nasty thoughts and feelings, for they are 
traitors on the inside. Do you understand me?’’ 

'‘I think I do, Father, but often it is a month before 
I really do.” 

'‘How well I know that,” and the priest began to 
laugh. “Let me repeat: keep your share in Charlie’s 
improvement, and do not lose it by jealousy; make him 
your friend, because he is willing and friends are few ; 
dodge all the trouble you can, because you will get 
enough without seeking it.” 

“I have it,” Lafayette admitted, “and thank you. 
Father.” 

He went away with a lightness of spirit which was 
not his before, and he saw as in a picture all the 
meanness he had been planning against himself as 
much as against others. If he had known how near 
misfortune was to him at that moment, what he had 
learned from Father Sherwood would seem even more 
remarkable. Miss Devere brought the news herself 
to the study of Father Sherwood. She had begun to 
suspect why the priest had sent her to live among the 
Lawtons, but she said nothing, only gossiped her re- 
ports of progress. 

“It is a delightful old house,” she said, “and when 
the ghosts are not walking the Lawtons are busy with 
even better pranks. Why didn’t you tell me to what 
a wonderful family you were sending me ?” 

“We are used to them,” he answered. “I knew the 
old house, so near the river, would suit your moods.” 

“My days are days of delight there. Mamma Law- 
ton is another Mrs. Nickleby. I spend hours with her, 
and we take walks, and exchange confidences. She is 
a lady, delicate in form, and how she ever stood the 
washtub is a mystery. But there is dynamite in the 
Lawton character. Each one has a stick of the stuff 
in his clothes, and it may go off any time.” 

“How is Beau doing?” 


152 


The Boy Who Came Back 

‘Tlannmg for a flight West with Wistaria, but she 
declines because I have hinted at a career on the stage. 
The child has talent and can work.'* 

‘'And Regina?’' 

“Oh, sitting on her trunk waiting for the family 
to blow up, when she will retreat in good order to 
New York.” 

“And my friend Lafayette?” 

“A regular trump ! Fighting with himself and the 
Lawton blood and bound to win in the end. What a 
pity for a lad of his temper to be handicapped with 
his ancestry. He has to %ht the people around him, 
fight his own weakness, and then fight what he has 
inherited. But he is doing a neat job. Only trouble 
seems never to have an end for the Lawtons. I have 
just lost my diamond ring.” 

Father Sherwood threw up his hands in a gesture of 
despair. 

“A thief in the family!” 

“Oh, it may have been mislaid or lost,” Miss Devere 
said placidly. “I think myself it was stolen. It would 
be easy to say that Beau took it. Regina is beyond 
such things, and Lafayette would die before he would 
steal. Wistaria is a child.” 

“Then you have been thinking what is best to be 
done ?” 

“Let the affair settle itself and keep a watch on 
the thieves.” 

“How did it happen?” 

“I left the ring in my room while down at break- 
fast, and when I returned it was gone. I did that 
often during the day. The room is on the first floor, 
next the veranda, and I saw a suspicious person loiter- 
ing outside while I was searching for the ring. I saw 
Beau speaking to this person later on his way to school. 
When I asked him who the young man was, he laughed 
and called him chief of a gang and a dear friend of 


The Diamond Ring 


153 


Lafayette’s and also a thief. So you see how many 
strings may be attached to my diamond ring. T 
searched everywhere in vain. I consulted the local 
chief of police and he has taken up the case.*' 

^*1 am afraid of the effect of this on the others.^^ 

‘‘I am not worrying/’ replied Miss Devere. “I shall 
manage the case, find the ring, and keep things secret. 
It is probably one of those incidents which settle every- 
thing for good. The fate of the Lawtons may depend 
on it.” 

‘^But I did not think I was recommending you to a 
house that held thieves,” said the priest. ‘T thought 
all the Lawtons honest, even if a trifle odd. You must 
not lose anything.” 

*T shall not lose even the ring, dear Father,” said 
she. “Now please leave the matter entirely to me and 
see how Providence will bring the right climax.” 

So it was settled that way, but it left Father Sher- 
wood rather sad. Would they ever get the Lawtons 
out of trouble? Would Regina be forced to exile her- 
self, and Lafayette take to the road? Upon one thing 
the priest was determined, that if Beau were the thief 
he should be sent at once to a reformatory. He had 
become the source of new troubles to the family. Deal- 
ing with the Lawtons, as Regina had said, was like 
seeing one section of a wall crumble while another was 
building. And there was no end to the process. It 
did seem as if the members of the family would have 
to separate and get distances between them, to save 
themselves. 


154 


The Boy Who Came Back 


CHAPTER XXIV 

THE THIEF 

I T was Beau who had stolen the diamond ring. He 
had no conscience in the matter, and had prepared 
for it in his cleverest fashion. From the moment 
he saw the flashing stone, and learned its value, he saw 
a way to carry out his idea of getting to Chicago 
in good style. But when the time came to steal the 
ring all kinds of difficulties arose. How could he 
escape the police, who would be searching for it ? How 
could he sell it? What if he should get caught at an 
unexpected moment? He did not like the idea of 
spending part of his life in jail, as he surely would if 
the theft were discovered before he could sell the ring 
and board a train for Chicago. He thought out these 
problems very carefully. He never thought of the sin, 
although only a little while before he had been to con- 
fession. Beau never thought of sin. Whatever he felt 
like doing he wanted to do freely, no matter what 
people thought about it. He did as he pleased until 
some one objected, or threatened him with a beating, 
like his brother Lafayette. The longer he thought 
the more clearly he saw that he must steal the ring at 
a moment when he could sell it before night, and with 
the cash get on a fast train for the West. But beat his 
brains as he would, he could think of no good plan to 
accomplish his designs. Unluckily for him at this 
point he met the chief of the gang one afternoon as 
he came home from school. He had taken the long 
way through the woods in order to think out his 
wicked plans, and he stumbled on the chief before he 
knew it. The chief was idling under the trees, and 
he just seized Beau by the legs and pulled him down 
beside him. 


The Thief 


155 


‘‘Now, my little detective,” said he, “for the first 
time I have you just where I want you, haven’t I?” 

“Of course you have,” said Beau, scared to death, 
for he knew that a fine beating awaited him. “But you 
are just the chap I want to see, for you are the only 
one who can help me carry out a little scheme that has 
a hundred dollars in it.” 

“Oh, you wanted to see me, did you? Well, not 
half as bad as I wanted to see you, sonny. And you 
can’t trick me with any schemes that have a hundred 
dollars in them. You’re a slick one, but right now you 
are going to get the nastiest walloping a sneaky kid 
ever got. Do you think that we forgot what you did 
to us in the lumber cave?” 

“I didn’t do it against you,” said Beau earnestly, 
“but against my brother. He tried to do me, and I 
was trying to do him. Of course you can wallop me, 
but you’ll lose your share of the hundred dollars, and 
I don’t know any other fellow that would be able to 
manage it with me, and get the money.” 

“Is there anybody such a fool as to leave a 
hundred dollars near you?” asked the chief with 
scorn. 

“Our boarder. Miss Devere, has a diamond ring 
worth one hundred and fifty dollars. She says she 
could sell it any time for one hundred. I want the 
money, because I’m going to run away to Chicago. All 
I have to do is to reach out my hand like this and take 
the ring. But then I can’t sell it. No one would buy 
a diamond ring from me. I’d be arrested maybe. Now 
if you know how to do these things, and I guess you 
do, for you’ve got a reputation, maybe you could put 
me wise.” 

“Nice scheme, good scheme!” said the chief with 
real joy. “Say, you’re the right sort. Beau. I can 
sell the ring, but what’s the use spending the money 
going to Chicago, when gay old New York is right 


156 The Boy Who Came Back 

here with more fun in it than in ten Chicagos? Why 
not stay here and work in with the gang?” 

“And have my nice good brother after me in a 
minute,” said Beau. “He'd put me in the Home, 
where he was. He'd be so glad to do that.” 

“Oh, we could hide you from him, and he couldn't 
fight the gang.” 

“But I want to see the country, and I'm going West 
anyway. Now can you help me, will you show me 
how to do the job?” 

“You just steal the ring, hand it over to me, and 
I'll sell it. That's all.” 

“That's all!” said Beau scornfully. “I can see my 
money coming back to me the next morning, after you 
got your paws on it. No, no, you'll have to find a 
better way.” 

They argued the matter over and over for an hour. 
Beau made it clear to the young desperado that he 
must be sure of his share, fifty dollars at least, before 
he would steal the ring. He also made it clear that 
he wanted to get away without any suspicion attach- 
ing to him ; and that he would like to have a companion 
on his trip West. 

“Why not take your brother with you?” 

“I have enough of him at home. But he wouldn't 
go anyway. He’s got pious. He helps the church 
now.” 

“Oh, there's a way of shutting down on that game,” 
said the chief. “I have a plan to rope him into our 
gang. Do you know your brother's a clever fellow? 
He’s got brains. If you had him with you out West 
you'd never want for money. He's that kind. Now 
I’ve been thinking out a plan. It's easy and nice. You 
take the ring, say tomorrow morning at eight o'clock. 
You give it to me right away. I fix it so that some 
one lets Lafe wear it over Sunday. He's fond of 
jewelry like his brother. He shows the ring to every- 


The Thief 


157 


body, says he bought it, for he likes to blow, like his 
little brother. In a few days he gives the ring back 
to the owner, not knowing just who the owner is. We 
talk everywhere about Lafe wearing diamonds. Then 
I sell the ring, and give you fifty dollars. You can 
hide the money and take it easy, going away just when 
you feel like it. The police go hunting for the thief. 
They hear about Lafe sporting diamonds. He’s 
pinched. He’s examined. There’s a rough time ahead 
of him.” Beau clapped his hands with joy and laughed 
loud at the misery in which his dear brother would be 
placed. 

‘That would pay him back well for all he’s done 
to me,” said he. 

“Well, he’s your brother, don’t forget that,” said 
the chief, looking at him with something like disgust. 
“Brothers should stand by one another. Now, here’s 
a thing to think about. He’ll get awful sore when 
they show him how deep he got into the ring business. 
They all do, these saint chaps. That will be the time 
to say to him: come along with me out West, and let 
us hunt gold mines. He’ll go. He’s a good fighter. 
When you take to the road, sonny, you’ll need some 
one to help you, because you meet some tough ones. 
And there’s no one like a brother, even if he did lace 
you good and hard, not as often as you deserved it.” 

“Fine idea,” cried Beau. “Say, chief,^’ you’ve got 
brains too. I’ll do everything just as you say. I’ll 
begin tomorrow. Be near our house between eight 
and nine. The church is having a picnic tomorrow in 
Mohegan Park. Lafe’s going to be there. That’s the 
time for you to work the ring on him.” 

It was thus agreed, and they parted in the best 
humor. Coming out of the woods Beau met Father 
Sherwood, who beckoned to him. 

“Wasn’t that the leader of the gang?” said he. 

“Yes, Father, and I guess he must have seen you. 


158 The Boy Who Came Back 

for he was going to muss me some, because I told 
the police about his lumber cave. He went off so quick 
that I didn’t know what happened. He said he felt 
like killing me.” 

‘'You had a narrow escape, my boy. Well, how 
are you getting along, and when are you going to 
make up your mind to be a good Catholic boy?” 

“Right away. Father. I’m getting along just the 
way I want to, and I’m going just as far and as fast 
as I can. I’ll get around to first communion before 
Christmas — I don’t think.” 

The last three words were said to himself, and he 
looked up at the priest with an engaging smile, all the 
time laughing at the ease with which a sharp little 
fellow like himself can fool even the wise priest. 

“Fine words, and I guess you mean them,” said 
Father Sherwood, “but as I told you before. Beau, I 
have no confidence in you. You always remind me 
of that boy I knew a long time ago. He was clever, he 
had a good face, and always sweet words on his 
tongue. But he never did anything he promised, he 
never went to church, he did as he pleased, just as you 
do, and when I warned him that there was trouble 
ahead for him he laughed. The next time I saw him 
he lay in a heap at the bottom of an elevator shaft 
half dead. And he died without knowing it, without 
a prayer, or an act of contrition for his many sins. 
What a sad ending !” 

The priest went on after this warning, and Beau 
walked home in a rage against this talk about death. 

“Anyway I’m not going to die,” he said, but his 
heart failed him just the same. Death is a terrible 
thing, no matter how one looks at it, but what’s the 
use of talking so much about it. The next morning 
he picked up the diamond ring, chatted with Miss 
Devere with the diamond in his pocket, went out after- 
wards and gave it to the chief, and then lounged 


The Thief 


159 


around town to see the fun when Lafayette got en- 
tangled in the net spread for him. The event came 
off at the picnic. There was a big crowd, the music 
sounded very sweet under the trees, ice cream was 
everywhere, and Lafayette seemed to be the biggest 
person on the grounds. He danced every time he could 
get a partner, and the girls seemed ready to oblige 
him. He flashed a diamond ring at Beau, at his 
friends, at his acquaintances. 

''A real diamond?’' asked Beau. 

His brother permitted him to examine it, and Beau 
saw that it was not Miss Devere’s ring, having only a 
general likeness to it. 

“Where did you get it?” 

“Loaned to me by a lady friend,” said Lafayette 
proudly. “I like diamonds. They match my soapine 
complexion. If I get a chance I’ll go into the diamond 
business, in the coal-yard.” 

The crowd saw that diamond all the afternoon and 
far into the evening. It became the joke of the young 
people. The gossipers took it seriously, saying that 
there would be no end to the impudence of the Law- 
tons, now that the priest had taken them up, made 
them actors, and accustomed them to wearing dia- 
monds. Every one saw that Lafe had the natural 
beauty of his family and a lively wit that belonged to 
himself. Perhaps they became a little jealous to see 
him so much handsomer, more popular, and more 
graceful than their own well-bred boys. Beau heard 
the talk about his brother and the diamond ring with 
great joy. The plot of the chief was working like 
a charm. When the police would set out on a hunt 
for the thief the trail would be as plain as the road 
to Irvington. It would lead right up to Lafayette, 
who would have some time trying to explain how a 
diamond ring fell into his hands the very day it was 
stolen from the owner. And all the time Beau would 


i6o 


The Boy Who Came Back 


be a sympathetic observer, his money hidden away for 
the right moment, when he could say to his afflicted 
brother: let us leave this miserable town and go hunt 
for a gold mine in Dakota. Beau had golden dreams 
for many days! 


CHAPTER XXV 

THE INVESTIGATION 

T he policeman in charge of the case of the dia- 
mond ring made his report to Miss Devere. It 
had been the easiest thing in the world to follow 
the clues that led up to the thief. Lafayette had worn 
the ring all day at the church picnic, had displayed It 
gaily to all that cared to look, and had then laid it 
aside. Since that day it had not been seen, and La- 
fayette’s allusions to it had been vague. 

‘T talked with him about it,” said the policeman, 
^‘telling him that a ring had been stolen and was being 
hunted for. I didn’t let on that I was on the job. He 
said then that it had been loaned to him in fun, that 
he had taken it for a paste stone in a brass setting, 
and had returned it to the owner. He took it quite 
easy, but he’s that kind of a criminal.” 

'‘Do you think, then, that he stole the ring.?” in- 
quired Miss Devere. 

"Quite sure of it, ma’am. His history and his repu- 
tation and his family are enough, but when you add 
his wearing a diamond ring the day yours was stolen, 
no detective wants any more than that.” 

"That’s the trouble with too many detectives,” Miss 
Devere could not help saying; "they are easily con- 
tented with the outside of things.” 

"Oh, well, if you want me to work any further, 
ma’am ” 


The Investigation 


i6i 


‘‘Most certainly I do/’ she replied, “but keep the 
matter a secret, for I have no desire to lose that valu- 
able ring. And if I followed your suggestion I might. 
Do you really believe that a clever chap like Lafayette 
Lawton would steal a ring in the morning, and wear 
it all day in a public place? Would any thief with a 
grain of sense in his head do that?” 

“Well, I thought of that,” said the policeman, “but 
thieves do the oddest things at times, things that help 
us to find them easy.” 

“Very true, officer, but this time you have not the 
right man. Look farther. Lafayette did not steal the 
ring. If he wore my ring that day he did not know 
it was mine. Some one fooled him into wearing it, 
just to lead a bright policeman on the wrong trail.” 

“By gum, I do believe you’re right, ma’am,” and 
he beat his head with his knuckles. “It’s an old trick, 
too. And now I think I know the real thief.” 

He vrent off with ardor on the new scent, and Miss 
Devere laid the facts before Father Sherwood, who 
was horrified at the evident attempt to lay the theft 
on Lafayette. 

“We shall have to get the lad’s aid in ferreting out 
the facts,” said he, “because we must know who gave 
him the ring, and if it was your ring.” 

“And I don’t like to bring him into it at all, just as 
things begin to go smoothly in that family of his. He 
will be cast down, and may do desperate things.” 

There was no other way, unless they wished to drop 
the matter altogether, so Lafayette was summoned to 
the study of Father Sherwood, along with Charlie 
Haven, for whom the priest had a special task in this 
affair. He explained to the boys the position, leaving 
out mention of Miss Devere’s name: a ring had been 
lost, it had been seen in Lafayette’s possession, and 
the owner wished to know how it had come there. The 
boy blushed. 


i 62 


The Boy Who Came Back 


‘Was that a stolen ring? The policeman told me 
about it the other day.’’ 

“The owner hopes that it was merely mislaid,” said 
Father Sherwood. 

“I got it from a Hastings girl,” said the lad. “I 
don’t know who she was. I was introduced to her, 
and I didn’t catch her name. She was showing this 
ring, and just in fun I took it off her finger and carried 
it around for the day. I gave it back to her before 
she went home.” 

“Did it look like the real thing?” 

“No, Father, it was brass, because the hoop greened 
my finger, but it shone like a good stone.” 

“I saw it,” Charlie said with a snicker. “It was 
just glass, not even crystal.” 

“Had either of you ever seen anything like it be- 
fore?” 

“Never.” 

“Well, we must trace the present possessor, for 
reasons,” the priest continued. “Who introduced you 
to the girl? Who would be likely to know her?” La- 
fayette could not remember, and no one on the 
grounds that day seemed to know more than her name. 
Father Sherwood saw that the plans of the thief had 
been well laid, so that nothing was to be gained in 
this way. 

“Who lost the diamond?” said Lafayette. 

“Miss Devere,” and at the name the boy went white 
and red. 

“Then Beau stole it, and tried to put it on me, and 
Lanky Bissell helped him, and it’s all up with the 
Lawtons,” said he. “We can’t keep straight and 
honest. I know that Beau is a crook. As Regina 
says : what’s the use of building up one part of a wall 
when the rest of it is tumbling all the while?” 

“You seem to be quite sure of it, without knowing 
the facts?” 


The Investigation 


163 


Lafayette did not answer, but sat there gazing 
moodily into space. He felt that all was over, and 
the fight ended. Regina would go away and the 
Queen would leave, when Beau went to a reform- 
atory and he himself took to the open road. He knew 
that the chief blame must rest with him, because he 
had broken loose the first, and had set Beau the 
example. The family had been wild and lazy and 
shiftless, but not criminal till now, when the thief 
had entered their circle. So what use to fight for 
better things? 

‘‘You feel like giving up?’^ said Father Sher- 
wood. 

“I have given up,” he replied. “I’ll get the thief 
and the diamond ring, and after that I’ll go.” 

“That is, you’ll lie down before you’re knocked out. 
Have you the yellow streak in you too ?” 

“I don’t understand you. Father.” 

“Well, let me make it plain. You have three good 
friends in this town, haven’t you?” 

Lafayette looked from the priest to Charlie and 
thought of Miss Devere. 

“Yes, I have,” he said. 

“How long did it take your family to go down 
the hill after your father deserted them?” 

“About ten years.” 

“And you have been working with me for their 
uplift not four months. You think that the evil of 
ten years can be made up for in four months ? Should 
you not think it would take at least ten years? So 
you are going to give up the fight and run away in 
the first round? Isn’t Regina worth working for? 
Isn’t Wistaria worth while? Is your mother worth 
nothing? And if Beau is the thief, is he not worth 
saving? And are you going to shame your friends by 
a backdown at the wrong time?” 

“Oh, I won’t back down, I’ll fight. I’ll stick it out, 


164 The Boy Who Came Back 

but what's the use? It was me yesterday, it is Beau 
today, maybe it will be Regina " 

And here he burst out crying and sobbing, utterly 
cast down by the disgrace that had come on him. He 
let the tears stream down his face without attempting 
to wipe them away. 

“It is a hard trial,” said Father Sherwood, “but it 
will be hopeless if you give up under it. Here is what 
we must do. Find the ring and the thief without any 
publicity. If Beau is the thief we shall deal with him 
properly. No one but ourselves, neither Regina nor 
Mamma, is to know anything about it. Cheer up. You 
are not beaten yet, unless you believe that you 
are.” 

He saw that Lafayette was already beaten in his 
own mind, so he said: 

“Go to the church and speak to Our Lord in the 
Blessed Sacrament. He will tell you the right thing 
to do, and give you the proper spirit. Do you go with 
him, Charlie, and pray alongside.” 

To Charlie he whispered as they were leaving: 

“Stay beside him from now till I give you per- 
mission to leave him. Don’t let him out of your sight. 
Cheer him. Soothe him. If ever he needed a friend 
it is now, till we straighten out this trouble.” 

The boys knelt in the church, barely illumined by 
the light of the sanctuary lamp, and uttered fervent 
prayers; but the heart of Lafayette was quite dead 
within him, and he asked for nothing, neither light, 
nor strength, nor hope, nor courage. He just felt that 
two things should be done: the ring found and the 
Lawtons flung out of the Ferry, at least Beau and 
himself, the malefactors. How it was to be done, he 
could not see clearly, but the thing should be done. 
The words of the priest seemed to have no effect on 
him. The patience and steadiness required for a good 
fight did not appeal to him. 


The Investigation 165 

'What are you going to do first?” asked Charlie. 

"Find Beau and get the diamond.” 

He bade Charlie good-night at the door, and went 
quietly to his bedroom, impatient to have it out with 
his brother, who had just gone to bed and was falling 
to sleep with a vision of Lafayette in the hands of 
the police. He looked out at a different Lafayette, 
staring at him with terrible eyes. 

"So you stole Miss Devere^s ring,” said he, "and 
you made it up with Lanky Bissell to lay it on me. And 
he was to sell it for you, and you were to go West 
while I went to jail; and now the police are after me 
again, and you’re as good as jailed; and the Lawtons 
have at last hatched out a first-class crook, and we’ll 
all sink together.” 

Beau would have been stunned by this exact descrip- 
tion of his misdeeds had he not been in mortal fear 
of a grand trouncing. He saw it coming in his brother’s 
set face. He thought only of escaping for the time 
being, so he hastened to say brazenly: 

"No more crook than you are. I stole the ring, and 
Lanky is going to sell it. I’m going West with the 
money, and I want you to come along. We can search 
for gold and come back rich. Lanky says he’ll go too, 
if you will. You might as well. The Lawtons can’t 
keep up like other people. Miss Devere won’t mind. 
It’ll be a good thing for Regina and Mamma to be rid 
of us. You’ll always be in trouble, and so will I. 
We take after Papa.” 

Lafayette could not help admiring the impudence 
of the lad, and something in his suggestion appealed 
to him. It was true, the Lawtons could never keep 
out of trouble. If Beau and he vanished, the others 
would get along decently. Leaving on stolen money 
was 'hardly the nice thing, but Miss Devere would not 
care, and in the end they would pay her back with 
splendid interest. Beau followed up these thoughts 


i66 


The Boy Who Came Back 


with smooth arguments, and so escaped a trouncing, 
even provoked his brother into minute inquiries as to 
how the ring could be sold and what were the nearest 
gold fields of the West. 

CHAPTER XXVI 

THE LAST STRUGGLE 

I AFAYETTE felt that he was about to do wrong 
^ and foolish things just from mere irritation; but 
he had said positively that it was time for the 
Lawtons to go, and to a certainty they were going. 
He would remove Beau and himself from among de- 
cent people, and return when he had made his fortune 
in the golden West. He would not argue with him- 
self or with Charlie Haven, who had a hard time of 
it keeping track of his depressed comrade. Of course 
Lafayette had no intention of departing from the 
Ferry with the stain of crime on his soul. The matter 
of the diamond ring had to be settled, and he was 
going to do it in the only right way. After he had 
arranged his plans, he had a talk with Miss Devere, 
who understood perfectly his present humor, and did 
her best to rouse him from his desperation. 

“Have you another ring. Miss Devere,'' he asked, 
“something like the stolen one, but not so expensive ?" 

“I have not," she replied, “but in a few hours I 
could get one from the city, one which would look 
even better than the real stone." 

“Then please get it, for it is part of the plan I have 
to get back your ring." She promised to get it that 
very day, and then went on to encourage him. 

“I do not like your looks," said she. “You have 
the air of a boy who is planning strange things, and 
I am afraid that you will do something to displease 
us all. Promise me now that you will keep right on 


The Last Struggle 


167 


in the same path which you have travelled so nicely. 
As Father Sherwood said, it must be uphill work to get 
the family just where it ought to be, and patience and 
courage must be the qualities to bring it about. Promise 
me. 

promise,'' said he. have the nicest plan ar- 
ranged you ever saw. You might not just like it, but 
in the end I think you will." 

“A doubtful promise," the lady thought to herself, 
*‘but I must be content with it for the present." 

The next night Lafayette had the ring, made of 
rolled gold and imitation diamond, but so new and so 
brilliant that the real stone could not compare with it. 
He took it with him to the first meeting with Lanky 
Bissell, who had been duly informed by Beau of the 
accession of his brother to their tramping party. Lanky 
pretended to be delighted, but he had his own plans, 
which did not include any sharing of the money with 
the Lawtons, or any departure from home. He had 
not yet disposed of the ring. Lafayette's first words 
threw his companions into astonishment. 

‘‘After all," said he to Beau, “you did not get the 
right ring. Miss Devere has a lot of jewelry, some 
of it good and some of it not. I went over her little 
collection last night, and she still has her two hundred 
dollar ring, with a few others, not so good. So the 
trip West must be postponed." 

Beau protested that he knew the ring, and Lanky 
drew it from his pocket, not willingly, for he feared 
a trick. 

“Just as I thought," said Lafayette, “compare it 
with this." 

He handed out his imitation ring for inspection, and 
the beauty of it carried conviction to the others. Be- 
side it the real stone looked rather commonplace. 

“The minute I saw this I knew that Beau had been 
fooled," said Lafayette. “Now the question is, can 


1 68 The Boy Who Came Back 

you really sell that ring so as to get a good price for 

itr 

'‘Course I can,” said Lanky. "I know the fence, 
and he knows me.” 

"Well, take that ring and sell it. Beau, you can 
have this two-dollar ring for your wedding day.” 

And he tossed him the real jewel, which Beau put 
on his finger and admired. 

"But don’t wear it around town, as I did the one 
you palmed off on me, or people will say we looted 
a jewelry store.” 

His manner was so indifferent that the suspicions 
of Lanky Bissell were lulled to sleep. He carefully 
hid the imitation stone in his clothes. 

"Now if you get one hundred and fifty for that 
ring,” said Lafayette, "it will be enough to start us in 
life, that is, get us out to the mines, but it will not 
be enough to pay our board for a week after we arrive. 
We must have more money.” 

"Well, let us take the rest of Miss Devere’s jewelry,” 
said Beau. 

"No, she did away with it. The Lawtons can’t 
rob her twice. I was thinking that there ought to be 
some money among the crap gang. Who’s the treas- 
urer, Lanky?” Lanky laughed at the audacity of the 
suggestion, to rob the treasurer. 

"Well, why not? It’s all stolen money, and any 
one has a right to take it from the thieves. Have they 
any money in the treasury, and how much?” 

"Maybe fifty dollars, I dunno, but I guess that 
much.” 

"Well, Beau is now qualified to be a member. You 
can tell them and get him in at the next meeting. I’ll 
join too, we pay our dues to the treasurer, and then we 
wait for him in the dark and take his money away 
from him. That won’t be stealing, taking stolen money 
from a thief.” 


The Last Struggle 


169 


Lanky took another fit of laughing, but in the end 
agreed to help in the plan, which could be easily car- 
ried out, and since they were going away West for 
good, the gang never could get even with them, or 
do them any injury. So it was arranged that Lanky 
should propose the names of the Lawton brothers at 
the next meeting, and that they should be initiated at 
once. The day after the three would take the train 
for the Western mines, on the strength of the stolen 
money. Lafayette made a deep impression on Beau 
by the cunning and variety of his villainy, and the 
latter felt happy at the prospect of having so able 
a scamp at his side in the journey to seek a fortune. 
He had a better example of his brother’s powers, when 
on the way home Lafayette took from him the ring 
which was thought to be only imitation, and said: 

‘‘After all. Beau, you stole the right ring. This is 
the real thing, and Fm going to sell it myself. Lanky 
had no more idea of sharing with you and me than I 
have now of sharing with him. His ring is worth two 
dollars, but he won’t find it out till he tries to sell it, 
then we can turn on him and say he lies and is selling 
us.” Beau was bewildered at this news, and began 
to sniffle. 

“I don’t know what to believe now,” said he. 

“Believe your big brother. Fve taken this affair in 
hand, and Fm going to carry it through right. Wait 
till you see the fun at the next meeting of the gang, 
when we go in as members.” 

Lafayette had a bad taste in his mouth when he 
handed her ring to Miss Devere. He had never dealt 
with criminals before so closely, and it sickened him 
to think that a Lawton should be the means of bring- 
ing him into contact with them. He had been a wild, 
disobedient, irresponsible boy, but crime he had shrunk 
from with instinctive horror: and the contact had 
made him all the more determined to get away from 


170 The Boy Who Came Back 

the people who knew him, to get Beau away to a new 
country, where perhaps different surroundings might 
wean him from evil ways. He said to his mother one 
night, when they sat alone: 

‘‘Is there a bad streak in the Lawtons, Mamma? I 
mean, something bad which is sure to come out some 
time in some one of us ?” 

“No, my son, only the bad streak which is in every- 
one.” 

“Then why can't we be good like other people, and 
stay good?” 

“Don’t we ?” she said placidly, and he had to laugh. 

He had made up his mind, and made it up queerly. 
He was going West on the fifty dollars of the gang. 
It was not a sin to take and use the money stolen by 
thieves. In no other way, not even by working and 
waiting, could he get fifty dollars for his purpose. His 
plan was to attend the meeting where Beau and he 
were to be initiated, make a large showing on the 
strength of the stolen diamond, and get at the treasury 
facts, secure the money, and be far on his way West 
by morning. He could not explain the behavior of 
Charlie Haven during these days. The lad seemed 
to be always with him, or in his way, and would linger 
in his company until he found some trick to escape 
him. Lafayette did not know that Charlie was playing 
detective on his movements, that he had learned many 
things, among them about the trip West and the initia- 
tion into the gang. Father Sherwood had been duly 
informed and sent a note at the last minute command- 
ing Lafayette to appear in his study. It was nine 
o’clock in the evening. Beau had tired of waiting for 
his brother, had packed up his clothes in a bundle, and 
gone to the lumber cave. He had not even looked in at 
his mother and sisters, not a sigh came from him, he 
was all joy at the thought of flight from home and 
mother. Charlie Haven handed Lafayette the note of 


The Last Struggle 17 1 

the priest, and the recipient felt that Charlie was the 
cause of it. 

‘'All right,” said he, “ril go up as soon as I have 
got away with a little business. It will take me ten 
minutes.” 

He was starting for the door, but Charlie barred 
the way. 

“He wants you now, before you do any business,” 
said Charlie. “In fact, he wants to prevent you from 
doing that business, and he ordered me to see that 
you went straight up when you got the note.” 

“Why is he so pressing?” 

“I guess he knows about the gang and the trip West 
and wants to head it off,” Charlie replied in a half 
whisper. 

“Same old sneak; you told him,” and with that 
Lafayette, enraged, struck Charlie in the face, and 
darted out the door. 

There was now no time to lose, since the priest knew, 
and he raced for the lumber cave in good style, undis- 
turbed by the pursuit of Charlie, who took a short cut, 
met him at a corner, put out a foot, and laid him full 
length on the ground. He rose and went at him head 
down like a bull. They were on the road to the sta- 
tion, in a smooth place, where stood a rude shanty and 
some old barns. The night was fairly luminous with 
stars. 

“What do you mean by all this?” demanded La- 
fayette as he fought. 

“I mean that you shall go up to see Father Sher- 
wood, if I have to carry you up, and Fm going to 
pound you till you do it,” was the reply. 

“The last score, before I leave,” said Lafayette, “I 
owe you this, and you are now going to get all that 
is coming to you.” 

But times had changed. The pupil was now the 
master, by a small margin, of course, in skill and in 


172 


The Boy Who Came Back 


wind. Lafayette fought from pride and anger and 
determination, and tried to close the account briefly, 
but it would not be closed. Charlie tired him running, 
and then raced in on him before he got his wind again; 
but he fought till his breath failed, his arms fell to 
his side, and his knees gave way. He fell exhausted. 

“Will you go now with me to the priest?” said 
Charlie. 

“I will. You win. I’m down for good,” and for 
the third time the tears streamed from his eyes in 
anguish and despair. 


CHAPTER XXVII 

THE LAST STAND 

T he world seemed upside down to Lafayette as 
they walked in the darkness up to the house 
of the priest. Something seemed to have broken 
within him. He could not think, or feel, or speak, ex- 
cept to repeat over and over to himself that he was 
down and out for good, beaten by a better man, and 
carried off like a captive. He stumbled as he walked. 
It did not even occur to him to run off in the darkness, 
and leave his conqueror to find him if he could. He 
forgot that Beau was in the hands of his enemies. Per- 
haps in danger of life and limb among the gang of the 
lumber cave. Thought simply left him, and he be- 
came indifferent to what happened next. As a matter 
of fact he was dazed from the emotions of the past 
few days, the shock of his fall when Charlie tripped 
him, and the punishment inflicted in the fight. He 
was so unnerved that if Charlie made a sudden move- 
ment he jumped to avoid a blow. They arrived at 
the priest’s and were shown at once into his study, 
where he sat waiting for them. Lafayette stared at 


The Last Stand 


173 


him as if seeing a ghost. In the shaded light, with 
his grave, sad face, Father Sherwood looked like a 
judge about to render a severe judgment. The boy 
had never seen that look in his face before and he 
trembled. Yet the priest spoke gently and kindly. 

“Well, did he come of his own accord, or did you 
force him to obey?” 

“I had to fight him,” said Charlie, and their ap- 
pearance confirmed the statement. “He pretended to 
obey your orders and then tried the disappearing act. 
He had it all planned to run away tonight with Beau, 
struck me in the face when I tried to stop him, and 
fought me when I tripped him up and told him he 
would have to come here.” 

“Very well. Thank you, Charlie, for your trouble. 
You may leave us alone, but remain within call, for 
you will be wanted as a witness soon.” 

Charlie went out and the priest motioned Lafayette 
to a chair. He had begun to tremble so that he could 
hardly stand, and was glad to sit down. Something 
seemed to be threatening him, something coming 
towards him like a ghost with outstretched arms to 
crush him. 

“I think you forget easily, Lafayette,” said Father 
Sherwood, “and I wish to bring some things to your 
mind. Do you remember the night your brother and 
sister ran away, and I came upon you all in the kitchen 
begging Regina not to leave you?” 

“I do, Father.” 

“Do you remember the engagement I took upon 
myself that night?” 

“Yes, Father.” 

“Tell it to me in your own words, as nearly as 
you recall it.” 

“You backed me in the promises I made to Regina. 
You stood sponsor for me, that I would never break 
again, and would help keep the family together.” 


174 


The Boy Who Came Back 


‘'Have I been a faithful sponsor?’' 

Lafayette’s face began to work with emotion, and 
he had to swallow the shameful tears. 

“Tell me, as far as you know, how faithful I have 
been.” 

“You persuaded Regina to stay with us,” said the 
lad, “and you sent us the Queen, I mean Miss Devere, 
and she helped us a lot, and was very good. She 
trained us for the show, and the show boosted the 
Lawton family great in the opinion of the Ferry 
people. I couldn’t tell all the things you did for us.” 

“You forgot one main thing. While Miss Devere, 
Regina, and Charlie were backing you every minute, 
I was praying for you daily in the Mass, that the grace 
of God might sustain you and the others in the fight.” 

Lafayette’s face began to work again and the tears 
drowned his sight. 

“Every day. Father?” 

“Every day, son. Why not? What a noble and 
beautiful task God had set before you! To help your 
poor mother, to rescue Regina from a lonely life in the 
city, to lift up the two children from ignorance and 
make them faithful servants of Christ I God sent you 
home to do that work, I most firmly believe. Do you 
remember what I said of you the day Regina intro- 
duced you ?” 

At this reminder all Lafayette’s self-possession fled, 
sobs shook him, and he sat there the picture of help- 
less misery, for he would not wipe away a tear from 
his shamed face. 

“I see you do,” went on the priest. “I believed then, 
and I believe still, that you were the visible answer 
of God to the prayers of your sister. What a splendid 
mission was confided to you. You were only a wild 
boy from an institution, yet God made you His answer 
to most fervent prayers.” 

“You believe that yet?” said the boy between sobs. 


The Last Stand 


175 


spite of my common sense I believe it yet. Any^ 
way, you were honored by God, I stood your sponsor, 
your friends rallied round you to help in the work, 
you gave your solemn word to stand by your charge 
to the last ditch: yet here you are tonight, caught like 
a deserter running away from the battle, with your 
word broken, your family abandoned, your God for- 
gotten, and your friends left in the lurch. How can 
you account for this shame T* 

'"Because Tm not fit for the job. Father. I’m just 
dirt, I am. My father ran away just like that, and 
left his wife and children. It runs in the blood, that 
dirt.” 

""You didn’t talk that way three months ago when I 
gave my word for you.” 

""I didn’t believe it then. I felt just as good as the 
best. I felt much better than Charlie Haven, even 
when Regina told me I wasn’t fit to be his bootblack. 
Now I know better. I saw the Lawton mud in my 
veins when Beau stole the diamond, and I said to my- 
self, there’s just one thing to do, get yourself and 
Beau away from Mamma and the girls, and they’ll get 
along all right.” 

""That was all right, too,” said the priest, ""if you 
had only taken the decent way about it.” 

""I couldn’t see any other way than to get out quiet 
like, and give no trouble. I gave the Queen her dia- 
mond.” 

""And you were going to steal your fare from the 
gang, so that people could say, the thieves had a fight 
in their den, and the cleverer party got away with 
the coin. Then the friends who stood by you, who 
defended you in public, who proved to the town that 
there was good stuff in the Lawtons, they were to have 
the grand laugh from the crowd for their friendship.” 

""I never thought of that,” said Lafayette ashamed. 

""If you had thought of leaving sensibly, decently, 


176 


The Boy Who Came Back 


you would have thought of us. Perhaps you do not 
understand. Would it not have been the gentle- 
manly ” 

‘‘Don’t call me a gentleman, Father.” 

“The gentlemanly thing to call on me and say: I 
must go and take Beau with me ; help me to get away 
where we can start new ; do it any way you please, but 
get me out of this town. Then we could have taken 
counsel. I know people in Chicago. It could have 
been given out that a fine chance had been offered you 
boys in the West. You could have gone away with 
everybody’s good wishes, and we would have been 
saved the ridicule of the crowd. But no, you must 
get in with thieves, rob them, steal away by night, and 
have the whole town prophesying that you would join 
the road-agents of the West.” 

Lafayette struck his hard head with his clenched 
hands. He would have suffered death by fire rather 
than Father Sherwood should be reproached on his 
account, or the Queen subjected to criticism. 

“Well, I am saved anyway,” he said at last, when 
the priest did not speak, “and since I am a fool, but 
not a thief yet. I’ll do whatever you say, Father, with 
my eyes blindfolded.” 

“Then I command you, as the answer of God to the 
prayers of your poor sister, to take up the work where 
you threw it down, and save your unfortunate family.” 

“Here! In the Ferry?” he cried with a gasp. 

“As you promised, as God sent you,” said the priest 
in a thrilling voice. “Do not forget that: as God sent 
you, as you promised!” 

Lafayette sank down in his chair like one who has 
fainted. 

“How can I do that? It’s not in me. I’m just dirt, 
and Beau is the same. It will be one meanness after 
another, until we land in jail for good.” 

“God did not think so when he sent you home, and 


The Last Stand 


177 


gave you such success,” Father Sherwood persisted. 
‘‘I do not think so. Miss Devere does not think so. 
You were sent here to win out. You have the nerve 
and the brains to win. You have failed because you 
trusted too much to yourself, too little to your friends, 
too little to God. Don’t you recall another thing I 
said that night in the kitchen? ‘You never failed any 
one yet, and never will. It’s your nature to be faith- 
ful.’ Do you recall that ?” 

“I do. Father. You always stood by me. I will 
do as you say. God help me to keep my word.” 

“Now you have the right idea of action, first and 
foremost the help of God. In the old days men who 
took up a great enterprise often vowed themselves in 
the presence of witnesses to their work. Now you are 
going to do the same tonight. After this no wavering, 
no mistakes, no ups and downs. Miss Devere, Charlie.” 

At the call these two persons entered solemnly, and 
Lafayette stood up to bow to the Queen, a little 
ashamed of his dusty and torn dress and stained face 
and broken up condition. 

“You are to be witnesses to the new resolve of 
Lafayette, who is now to vow himself to the noble 
work which God requires of him. You are to be the 
witnesses, because you are his friends and helpers. 
Kneel, Lafayette, and hold this crucifix in your hands. 
Repeat after me this most solemn promise,” said the 
priest. 

Lafayette knelt with the crucifix in his hands and 
repeated the words of the promise: 

“From this moment I dedicate myself, body and 
soul, time, talent, money, and whatever is mine, to 
the care and training of my family. I promise to be 
faithful unto death, to labor, until God releases me, 
for their happiness and salvation. Nothing shall turn 
me from the work, no circumstances, no hindrances, 
no arguments, no persuasions. And I humbly ask 


178 


The Boy Who Came Back 


God to help me keep my promise, with the aid of my 
friends and the aid of His grace. Through Christ 
Our Lord. Amen.’' 

He kissed the crucifix, stood up ^ with tears in his 
eyes, and felt the handclasp of Miss Devere and 
Charlie on either side, while the priest beamed on him. 

‘‘You are now an honorable knight. Sir Lafayette,*’ 
said Miss Devere, ‘'and in every battle you must either 
win or die. Running away is out of the Question.” 


CHAPTER XXVIII 

AFLOAT 

I T was ten o’clock when the boys left the house of 
the priest, Lafayette a very subdued boy, very con- 
trite and remorseful, and gladdened that Father 
Sherwood took so much care with him. The priest 
had remembered even the most trifling incident and 
word in connection with the wild boy since his return 
to the Ferry: and had brought them forward in his 
chat so effectively that Lafayette felt flattered. They 
were discussing these things when the name of Beau 
was mentioned, and his brother jumped half his own 
height into the air. 

“What was I thinking of?” he shouted. “Beau has 
been in the hands of the gang since eight o’clock, and 
by this time they’ve murdered him. Me for the lumber 
cave and the police.” 

“Especially the police,” said Charlie, detaining him 
as he began to run. “No more blunders, or mistakes, 
or hurry. Let’s think this thing out before we all go 
into the hole together.” 

“Right you are, and I reckon Beau can take care 
of himself in a pinch, but he’s in with a bad crowd. 
They expected him and me to join tonight, and they 


Afloat 


179 


were looking for* a heap of money from a diamond 
ring. They won’t do a thing to Beau when they find 
the real facts.” 

They hurried down to the dock and engaged the 
services of a policeman on the way; but they found the 
cave deserted, and no signs of what might have hap- 
pened there. The policeman rebuked them for leading 
him on a wild-goose chase. Lafayette began to 
prowl about the yard like a cat, listening, dodging, 
waiting. He felt presentiments of coming trouble. It 
was likely that the lad had been cuffed and trounced 
by the disappointed members of the gang. He would 
not have gone home on that account, but have waited 
for the appearance of Lafayette. Charlie proposed a 
trip to the house to see if he had arrived home, but 
Lafayette showed that Beau had bidden an eternal 
farewell to home and would be in any other spot on 
earth than that. 

“I’m just afraid that the gang did something to him 
and then left,” said he. “They’re not around, he’s 
gone, and yet both of them want me very bad. I feel 
that in a few minutes some one will come stealing in 
here, and give us the real news.” 

And the next moment he gave Charlie a warning 
gesture and both sank out of sight as two figures 
appeared a little farther off, quietly walking down the 
lumber lanes towards the dock. The boys followed 
on velvet feet, and got near enough to recognize Lanky 
Bissell and another member of his crew. They stood 
for a few minutes peering eagerly into the darkness 
which hung over the river, for the night had become 
very cloudy. Then they began to whisper to each 
other. 

“If we could get hold of a boat of some kind 
and row up and down the shore we might find him," 
Lanky said. “Oh, it was a mean thing to do with a 
kid, send him adrift in that rotten boat without an 


i8o The Boy Who Came Back. 

oar. It's going to blow up a storm, too, before morn- 
ing." 

'‘Is that what you did to Beau ?” Lafayette answered 
in the same whisper. “Sent him adrift in a boat with- 
out oars?" 

“That’s what we did," Lanky replied, while his 
comrade vanished into the darkness. “It wouldn’t 
have mattered much in daylight, but the night and 
the storm and the big boats on the river, and he with 
no oars, he’s in a tough place. The gang got so riled 
that they didn’t just think what they were doing.’’ 

There was only one thing to be done on the spot, 
get some kind of a boat, a hook, ropes, and lanterns, 
and begin a search for the unfortunate Beau. 

“He may have floated ashore,’’ Lafayette said. 
“He’s cork anyway.’’ 

“No, I think not,’’ Lanky replied, for he was really 
anxious. “The tide was rushing in when we shoved 
the boat off from the dock, and he flew north like a 
freight train. He went straight for the middle of the 
river, where the big boats are.’’ 

After inquiry along the dock the boys succeeded in 
finding a boat and the necessary equipment. The 
lanterns were lit and Lanky held them while the others 
did the rowing. The plan was to follow the shore 
north, swinging the lanterns and calling Beau’s name 
at intervals, until they got opposite Nyack; then to 
cross the river and come down on the west side. Beau 
had been afloat one hour or so, and the tide had been 
running all that time perhaps ; so that he had travelled 
north in his heavy, old boat, a relic of former days, 
a distance of five miles. No doubt he would do his 
best to rock the boat towards shore, and maybe he 
had picked up a loose bit of board to serve as a 
paddle. It was fairly certain, however, that he was 
still afloat, and if the boat took the center of the 
stream he was in great danger, without oars or lights. 


Afloat 


i8i 


before the heavy craft which sailed hourly in mid- 
stream. The boys rowed up along the shore and 
called Beau’s name in vain; they lingered here and 
there to examine various objects v^rhich might have 
been upturned boats and were not; then they crossed 
the river at Tarrytown to the village of Nyack, all 
in a fog, which shut out everything and made their 
venture dangerous ; finally they passed down the west 
side to the end of the big, deserted pier which runs 
out from Piermont. The fog vanished after a while 
before a south wind which promised to grow stronger, 
and by the light of the stars they could see quite a dis- 
tance, but no sight of Beau appeared. Below the great 
pier, now falling into ruin, there is a great marsh two 
miles long and nearly as wide, in which grows a thick, 
cane-like plant, so close together that boats have dif- 
ficulty in forcing a way through. Here and there are 
islets of hard ground on which houses have been built 
by fishermen; and to these houses water-lanes from 
the river have been cut among the swamp-foliage. 
The boys sailed along these lanes looking for a lost 
boat and calling Beau’s name. There was no answer. 
At three in the morning they had come to a point op- 
posite the Ferry, a hamlet called Sneeden’s Landing, 
where they hoped the lost boy might have drifted. It 
had a harbor protected from the south wind, which 
was now blowing roughly and tossing the waters into 
white foam. Here they decided to rest awhile, for 
they had been rowing and shouting and scouting for 
over five hours. No one knew what to do next. The 
river was getting dangerous for small boats, and the 
boys were not experienced oarsmen. The ferryman 
lived near by, whose business it was to transport pas- 
sengers across the river in a motor boat. Charlie sug- 
gested that they hire the ferryman to take them home 
and to continue the search for Beau; but when they 
had waked the man he declined the job on the ground 


1 82 The Boy Who Came Back 

that his boat could not be used for any other purpose 
than ferrying. 

Morning came and with it an abatement of the 
wind, so that they were encouraged to set out for 
home. By rowing at first southeast they were enabled 
to meet the high seas fairly well, and when they had 
got three-fourths across they could turn with the wind 
and almost sail home. It was near five o’clock and the 
light had become strong and clear on the river. La- 
fayette scanned the water carefully for the missing 
boat and the unlucky Beau. Up towards the High- 
lands the night boat from Albany was sailing along 
like a gigantic swan. Perhaps an hour later the Troy 
boat would follow it. If Beau’s craft fell foul of 
either steamer he would be crushed and drowned at 
the same moment. Lafayette had a feeling that their 
labors and anxieties of the night were thrown away, 
because a scamp like Beau was almost sure to turn up 
after a good breakfast and a comfortable night with 
a laugh for the people who had worried and worked 
for his safety. This time the feeling was misplaced. 
Even as he said it to himself, he saw in the middle of 
the river the shadow which might be the lost boat. 
He pointed it out to the others, and Lanky recognized 
it at once. 

“It’s a staunch old tub,” said he, “and will float 
till the last minute.” 

“But it’s right in the path of the night boat,” said 
Charlie with a look of horror and despair. 

“The pilot will see it,” said Lafayette, “but from 
here it doesn’t look as if there was anybody in the 
boat.” 

They rowed in fear and trembling in the heavy sea, 
which continued, although the wind had gone down 
considerably. It was clear that they would not reach 
the boat until the steamer had passed on, so they 
planned to avoid being swamped by the swell from the 


Afloat 


183 


steamer and the rough sea together, and also to help 
Beau if he needed it. They had gotten near enough 
to see everything, but the boat showed no sign of an 
occupant. The big steamer kept a straight path, quite 
indifferent to the drifting boat. Almost at the last 
minute a little figure sat upright in the boat, gazed 
stupidly around, like one waking from sleep, saw the 
steamer bearing down upon him, waved his arms and 
screamed; the boys yelled warnings and exclamations 
of horror at the same moment; but everything was 
swallowed up in an instant by the onrush of the huge 
vessel, whose heedless officers remained unconscious 
of the tragedy going on under the hull. For even as 
Beau shouted his horror and alarm the little boat rose 
on the wave of the steamer’s forefoot, slammed and 
crashed against her side a moment later, and was 
swallowed up in the vortex underneath the paddle- 
wheel. Beau never knew just what happened. He 
was tossed like a cork until the breath and the life 
went out of him, slammed against one thing and an- 
other, smothered in salt water until his lungs seemed 
to burst, and then sucked down, down, down, twisted 
as if he were a corkscrew, and at last thrown up some- 
where, perhaps at the end of the world. 

Meanwhile the horrified boys witnessing the tragedy 
had to fight for their own lives, between the wind and 
the waves. Lanky got a rope ready to throw to Beau 
if he appeared again, the others kept the boat steady. 
When the waters grew calmer after the passage of the 
steamer Lanky gave a cry of joy, for the little boat 
suddenly appeared from the depths, upset and injured, 
but able to float ; and a minute later Beau appeared al- 
most beside it and feebly seized the end of it. He 
was unable to drag himself out of the water. 

“Row now for your lives, and we’ll get him,” 
shouted Lanky, who held the rope in one hand and the 
hook in the other. Quickly they were alongside the 


184. 


The Boy Who Came Back 


boat, and quickly Beau was hooked at the end of the 
pole. The trouble began in getting him into the boat. 
He was unconscious, and yet he hung with a death 
grip to the wrecked boat. Their shouts did not waken 
him. Lanky managed the affair very well. He placed 
the hook between the boy's shoulders, so that his head 
would not get under water, dragged him slowly to the 
stern while the others held the boat steady, bent down 
over the stern so as to get a grip of Beau under the 
arms, and then lifted him in. Without further talk 
the rowers pulled hard for the shore. The out- 
stretched lad in the bottom of the boat looked and lay 
like one dead, and Lanky wept as became a murderer. 


CHAPTER XXIX 

THE FIRST COMMUNION 

E xhausted by their labors and terrors the 
boys reached the shore. Lanky slipped away 
after a brief explanatory remark to Lafayette. 
Charlie hastened to the nearest livery stable and sent 
down a wagon with a mattress to bear the body of 
the boy home ; then he telephoned to the nearest phy- 
sician a request to hurry to the Lawton house ; last of 
all he sought Mrs. Lawton to break to her the news. 
Five women were waiting for him in keen distress: 
his mother with a long lecture on her lips and joy in 
her eyes; Regina, who had not gone to work; Miss 
Devere who had spent the night consoling them with 
speeches on Lafayette’s fidelity, Mamma and Wistaria, 
not greatly disturbed. His news sent them all skurry- 
ing to make preparations for doctor and patient'. 
Meanwhile Lafayette sat on the dock beside the still 
body of his brother, and felt unutterable things. How 
often had he heard the priest say: by sin came death 


The First Communion 185 

into the world! Yet never until now had he realized 
the force of the saying. Here were two sinners, one 
living and the other dead. It was merely good luck 
that four bodies were not floating in the depths of the 
fierce river, as the result of the Lawton sins. Lanky 
had declared himself in his terror the murderer of this 
boy, but Lafayette knew better. Beau had brought 
about his own death by his sins, and he, his brother, 
had helped him. 

He felt Beau’s pulse and put his ear to his heart. 
All was still, and he groaned in his anguish. Oh, had 
he only been faithful for a few days longer, had he 
listened to the priest, had he accepted the advice of 
Miss Devere, had he followed Charlie, or even obeyed 
his own instincts, what a different spectacle this morn- 
ing would present. Now, his brother lay dead on the 
ground, so pale and still, wet and torn and battered 
like a rotten log, that he felt like screaming for help. 
Then the crowd came around as the news of the 
tragedy spread, and he had to explain the running 
away of Beau, his being put in the boat without oars, 
and the tragedy under the hull of the night boat. He 
was glad when the wagon came and carried them 
home, awful as it was to face Regina and his mother ; 
but he did his part like a man, helped the doctor and 
Miss Devere, who took charge, and told his story to 
Father Sherwood. Charlie Haven backed all his 
statements. The doctor brought Beau back to some 
kind of consciousness, which showed a mild delirium. 
He examined his hurts and gave him a day or two to 
live. His bones were broken in leg and arm, his spine 
injured, his ribs broken. That he had lived at all was 
a miracle. 

'"He lived to make his first communion,” the priest 
whispered to the horrified and stricken Regina. “Now 
just spend your time in praying for full consciousness. 
Lafayette, you have done him that much service. It 


i86 


The Boy Who Came Back 


was brave work for you and Charlie. Thank God that 
we have not to mourn any other death than this.” 

Everybody looked at the two boys, pale and wearied, 
but strong in their youth and courage, and sighed 
with relief. These might have been victims too, and 
the very thought of that hideous spectacle, three boys 
brought home dead to that house, set all the women 
weeping, even while they rejoiced at escaping such a 
calamity. It took the edge off their fright and grief, 
and inclined them to resignation. Lafayette told the 
entire story to Regina. There was no longer any use 
for concealment. He told on himself candidly. A 
new spirit had risen up in him after so many misfor- 
tunes. He was just going to take things as they came, 
regardless of consequences, and to stand by the ship 
till it went down under the load of the Lawton sins. 
Regina had nothing to say. She too was in the pres- 
ence of death for the first time, and was astonished 
and prostrated to learn how dreadful it is under one’s 
own roof. She used to wonder why people made so 
much ado over the dead. Were they not dead, beyond 
pain and knowledge, and why weep so bitterly and so 
long? She wondered no longer, and looked with a 
kind of horror at her mother and brother and sister, 
knowing that death might snatch them at any moment. 

Miss Devere sustained and encouraged them all. 
Charlie Haven took Lafayette to his own room for 
rest and consolation. Everybody was kind. Beau 
came out of delirium in the afternoon, very weak, full 
of pain, overcome with wonder. He recalled the 
descent into the maelstrom under the big boat, and was 
astonished to find himself in mother’s room. He saw 
the table turned into an altar with candles and cruci- 
fix, and Miss Devere standing at the window watching 
the setting sun. He soon found his bearings, and un- 
derstood his helplessness. Very likely he was a dead 
boy, and he began to cry in silence. He could move 


The First Communion 


187 


only his head. How had he been rescued from such 
a place ? How had he been brought home ? That was 
the first question asked of Miss Devere, when she 
came to his side and found him conscious. 

‘‘Your brother and Charlie Haven were out all 
night searching for you/' said she. “You must have 
fallen asleep in the boat or you would have heard them 
calling you. The steamer ran you down and they 
pulled you out of the water with a hook." 

“I got the hook at last, did I? I was a long time 
deserving it. Why can’t I move? Oh, what pain!" 

“You are badly injured, child. You must not try 
to move. The doctor will be here again to take a 
look at you." 

“I don’t need any doctor, Miss Devere," he an- 
swered. “I’m gone, and I know it. All I need now 
is the priest." 

“He has been here too." 

“I’m sorry I took the ring. Queen, ’’ 

She put her hand gently over his lips and he kissed 
it. 

“I am sorry for everything," he went on. “Oh, 
Queen, I never saw anything as I did last night float- 
ing around on the river. I saw my whole life and all 
my bad actions just like real people passing before 
me. I saw the stars looking at me like eyes out of 
heaven. They kind of pitied me, I think. I saw 
Wistaria going to communion and I wished I had gone 
too. Every minute when I wasn’t thinking and see- 
ing, I was expecting the boat to turn upside down or 
the steamer to run me down. Oh, what a night! It 
was so dark all the time. And darker when the fog 
came up. Then I fell asleep, but I didn’t want to, for 
I had to watch for the steamer. The next I knew it 
was daylight and the steamer was right on me. What 
a scream I gave, but nobody heard any more than if 
it was a mosquito." 


1 88 The Boy Who Came Back 

Miss Devere smoothed his hair and said in her 
gentle, soothing voice, 

“What a mercy that you were spared to die in your 
Mamma’s house! You will now make your first com- 
munion. I have everything ready, and Father Sher- 
wood will come down as soon as I send for him.” 

She had already sent for him by a signal to Regina 
in the next room. 

“Yes, it’s good to die at home, and not be drowned 
and killed in the river. But how I would like to live 
a little while. Queen, just to enjoy the family, and 
you and Charlie Haven and Father Sherwood. I 
didn’t care much for you when I was well, but now 
everything looks so different.” 

How well poor Miss Devere knew that, the new- 
ness of all things in the strange light of death. 

“It’s because heaven is so near,” she answered, “that 
one sees so well and clearly. It is another light than 
that of day, the light of heaven.” 

“I’m afraid heaven is not very near me,” sighed the 
poor lad. 

“Our dear Lord will bring it near you. Beau. And 
you will not mind a brief stay in purgatory with us 
all praying for you.” 

“Will any one pray for me, do you think?” 

“What a question! As if we did not love you!” 

“I never loved any one but myself — till now. Now 
I hate myself and I seem to love everybody and would 
like to stay with them forever.” 

Father Sherwood came in presently and Miss De- 
vere withdrew. 

“Well, Beau, you have got your desire at last. You 
are going to run away from us for good and for all,” 
said the priest in his direct way. 

“It isn’t exactly running. Father, but it’s too swift 
just the same for me,” said Beau smartly. “Isn’t there 
just a little chance that I may live?” 


The First Communion 


189 


‘‘Not a chance, according to the doctor. So make 
your confession, and I will get you ready for your 
journey. 

A most fervent confession the lad made. Then 
the whole family was called in to witness the admin- 
istration of the Last Sacraments, and with a group of 
friendly neighbors they knelt around the bed. To 
Beau it seemed like a wonderful dream, as strange in 
its way as the rush under the steamer’s hull in the 
depths of the river. He felt the sweetness of the Holy 
Communion on his tongue and in his breast; he felt 
the touch of the Holy Oil on his eyes, ears, nose, lips, 
palms, and feet; he took pleasure in the sound of 
the priest’s voice and the soft tones of Charlie an- 
swering him; he looked long at the faces of his 
brother and sisters and Mamma, and wondered how 
he could ever have hated faces so sweet and loving, 
now all stained with tears for him; and his brother 
had risked his life for him, and brought him home to 
this happiness ; and Charlie Haven had done the same ; 
and they would all pray for him and weep for him 
when he was gone ! He had wasted his time on him- 
self and worthless boys, who would never think of 
him again after his burial, and only in death did he 
get the wisdom to appreciate and love what God had 
given him so generously. 

When the last prayers were said Mamma came and 
kissed him. So did all the others in turn, and their 
soft kisses seemed to him like the touch of the Holy 
Oil, full of healing and forgiveness. He was just able 
to murmur a faint “forgive me” to each one, and then 
the strange pallor of death passed over his face, the 
light left his eyes, and with a sigh poor Beau passed 
away to his judgment. The women wept and the 
priest uttered the last prayers for the . repose of the 
weak soul. Lafayette felt like his brother’s slayer. 
He knelt with the others, but never took his eyes off 


The Boy Who Came Back 


190 

the dead face. He helped to prepare him for the cof- 
fin, and his heart lay like lead in his breast. Oh, what 
a terrible thing must sin be to produce a change so 
awful ! Why should one who has seen death like this, 
steeped his hands in it, so to speak, ever have the 
courage to sin again? All the scenes of the next few 
days deepened in him this tremendous impression: the 
closing of the coffin: the march to the church, the 
solemn Mass of requiem : the heart-breaking music of 
the organ; the march to the grave: the lowering of the 
coffin into the earth: worst of all, the sounds of the 
loose clods falling on the coffin and the closing forever 
of the grave! 

Then he learned for the first time seriously the com- 
fort and strength to be found in a friend. Charlie 
Haven stood by him, accompanied him, looked after 
everything, anticipated his slightest want, was present 
and absent at the right time, with looks and words 
that touched every fibre of his heart. Then he learned, 
too, the fine responsibility of a son and a brother, for 
Mamma and Regina leaned on him for strength and 
comfort. He went to the funeral ceremony a boy, 
and he came back a man! Death had not come to 
him in vain. 


CHAPTER XXX 

A SURPRISING EVENT 

T he days that followed the tragedy were days of 
peace. Autumn was about to begin, school was 
opening, and people were making preparations 
for the winter. The Lawton family took up the daily 
task in their own way; Regina and Lafe went to work, 
Wistaria helped mother and then went to school. Miss 
Devere as usual helped and consoled when she could. 


A Surprising Event 191 

Death had a great effect upon the Lawton household. 
Mamma spoke of Beau with affection in her easy way ; 
he had been such a nice baby that she could not under- 
stand his wilfulness when he grew up; but she was 
grateful that he had time to receive the Sacraments 
and pass away with the blessing of the priest. Had 
he grown up he might have become a worthless man 
like his father. 

“Was his father wicked?’' Miss Devere asked. 

“No, my dear, only shiftless, as Aunt Ophelia used 
to say of Topsy,” Mamma replied amiably, for she 
was always amiable. “I never could understand why 
he left us as he did. We never heard of him again 
except through reports, which said that he became a 
tramp and died on the road. But I never believed that. 
Because he was very proud, even if he had a wild 
streak in him.” 

“Is Lafayette like him?” 

“So much that I often watch his ways and his words 
and his little tricks of behavior.” 

“Had he quarreled with the family before he wan- 
dered away ?” 

“Oh, dear no. Miss Devere. He had been drinking 
much and lost his wages, and felt down-hearted. 1 
think he was just despondent. He was not doing well 
and I had to find work to keep bread in our mouths. 
The children hardly remember him, except Regina. 
I feel that he is dead, because with all his faults he 
was kind and would not willingly desert us.” 

It was true that the children rarely spoke of their 
father, and no picture of him hung anywhere. Evi- 
dently he was not mourned. Beau had a larger place 
in the Lawton mind just now than the absent parent. 
Lafe said that he never could forget the last hours 
of his brother, his face in the coffin, the incidents of 
the funeral. 

“Oh, my dear boy,” his mother said, “the thing to 


192 


The Boy Who Came Back 


remember is that Beau died a good death, and thie 
thing to do is to pray for his soul that he may have 
rest. All the other things are happening every day 
to thousands of people. They are quite common.” 

‘‘The first time in your own family is not common, 
Mamma,” the boy said. “The day before Beau died 
I felt like giving him a funeral all by myself, and now 
I would be glad to see him come jumping in the door 
there.” 

“Well, well, it’s all for the best,” said Mamma with 
a sigh. 

The great grief was that the time had come for 
Miss Devere to return to the city and her professional 
work. She might have delayed her departure until 
the first of October, but for a change in the ownership 
of the old house occupied by the Lawtons and the 
Havens. A rich man had bought it, and was about 
to make extensive repairs. The old park had already 
begun to fill up with lumber and other material, and 
the tenants had received notice to vacate. The Havens 
had secured a new house and were then busy moving 
their furniture. The agent in charge had made an 
agreement with the Lawtons to remain, to take charge 
of the building until the new owner was ready to move 
in, and to accept a handsome monthly sum for their 
service. 

“This gentleman really appreciates us,” Lafe re- 
marked, “and I may be permitted to say that in the 
history of the Lawton family this appreciation does 
not often occur. How is that for refined language. 
Miss Devere?” 

“The language is good, but the fact is deficient,^’ 
Miss Devere replied. “Have you forgotten- the ap- 
plause and appreciation lavished on the Lawton family 
at the entertainment?” 

“Right,” he answered. “Neither have I forgotten 
the complete roasting which we got from the mob 


A Surprising Event 


193 


when they found out the Lawtons were the entertain- 
ers. Never again for me, the public stage in the 
Ferry. But honest, Miss Devere, won’t you come out 
as often as possible just to see how we are getting 
along? And how are we to get along without you? 
Oh, I know what Mamma says, that we must get 
along any old way, no matter who comes or goes ; but 
just the same we shall miss you and want you.” 

‘‘Same here,” said the others affectionately. 

“She must come up and give me lessons,” said Wis- 
taria. 

“Well, believe me, Wis, if there was no stronger at- 
traction for her than a mysterious bride ” 

“Now, Lafayette,” said Miss Devere severely, “no 
more teasing about days that are over. We all live 
in glass houses, so throw no stones and see that none 
are left lying about.” 

The change in Lafayette this time was profound. 
Miss Devere saw it and believed it, yet there lingered 
in her mind a faint suspicion that at any time the wild 
streak in him might show itself with violence. He 
had told her in a moment of confidence that after the 
death of his brother something in him had broken and 
sunk, so that he could not even think of the foolishness 
and recklessness which before seemed to go with him 
everywhere. She repeated this to Regina, with the 
advice to deal with him always very gently and never 
to give him up. Her reason for this feeling and the 
advice she did not mention to Regina, but she told 
it freely to Father Sherwood in their last conversation. 

“I suppose he is like the majority of people,” she 
said, “he will never be able to stand alone. He must 
depend on some person whom he admires. It is I now, 
it was you yesterday, it will be his wife to-morrow, 
and perhaps his children later on. He has character, 
determination, ability, he is not lazy, he loves the best 
things, but at a fatal crisis he will take a great tumble, 


194 The Boy Who Came Back 

and some friend must be near him then to hinder dis- 
aster.” 

'‘Well, that is interesting,” Father Sherwood an- 
swered, “because the very party suited to that job has 
just appeared on the scene. His father has turned up 
after a ten years’ absence, and is eager to resume his 
family position.” 

“His father!” 

Miss Devere almost screamed the phrase, and threw 
up her hands in despair. 

“Another problem, another Rochambeau, in the 
family ! Oh, impossible !” 

“It is not quite so bad as that,” Father Sherwood 
said. “I think indeed that he comes at the right mo- 
ment and in the right way. I was sitting here only 
a few weeks back when he called and sent in his card. 
It read: George Washington Lawton. Quite like the 
family fondness for names. A well-dressed, bearded 
man came in and began to talk comfortably, saying 
that he was the head of the Lawton family, one of 
whom had died a short time ago. He was very frank, 
telling of his former failings, his shame at being un- 
able to take proper care of his family, and how he 
had drifted into the easy life of the road. But he 
never became a tramp. After years of shifting about 
aimlessly, he found a fixed place in a mining town 
of Montana, made money, got into trade, got out of 
bad habits, and decided to return and share his pros- 
perity with his family.” 

“Prosperity,” Miss Devere repeated. “Please don’t 
tell me he is rich.” 

“Not quite that, but he has one hundred thousand 
in the banks and a good business which brings him a 
decent income.” 

“Why that is rich. Father. And why does he not 
reveal himself?” 

“He asked my advice on the matter. I was afraid 


A Surprising Event 


195 


of many things. Would these poor souls reject him, 
in their anger at his desertion? He is very humble 
and repentant. But the Lawtons are really odd. So 
I advised him to proceed gently. He bought that old 
house in which you reside, and he is going to make it 
over for the family. He is paying them now to take 
care of it, and when it is finished he will move in, 
but they will not have to move out. It will be 
theirs.” 

“Oh, how perfectly lovely and romantic!” Miss 
Devere cried as she clapped her hands. “It is just 
like a fairy story. Imagine Mamma Lawton waking 
up some fine morning to find that palace her very 
own.” 

“And that is not all,” Father Sherwood went on. 
“I am going to send both Regina and Lafayette to 
work in their father’s office. He has so changed in 
ten years that they will not recognize him. In fact, 
the boy barely remembers him, while simple-minded 
Regina would never connect a man whom she con- 
siders dead with the head of a New York business. In 
that way I hope to bring the reconciliation about with- 
out friction, introduce the Lawtons to prosperity 
without too hard a bump, which often unsettles good 
people.” 

“I shall leave for the city without the slightest 
worry, Father,” said Miss Devere, as she bade him 
good-by. “That father will look after his children, 
and they will not be spoiled by fortune. Oh, what 
great luck for the poor souls I” 

In fact, that last night in the old mansion she could 
not keep her eyes off the four simple souls, so ignorant 
that fortune stood at their door, so soon to be over- 
powered by genuine happiness. As if magic were in 
the air, the talk turned on the absent father. That 
day Lafe had carried a letter from Father Sherwood 
to the manager of the Lawton Manufacturing Co., 


196 


The Boy Who Came Back 


recommending the bearer as fit and capable for a cler- 
ical job. After a little conversation the boy was given 
a desk and his instructions. The wages were good, 
and the place looked pleasant. 

'The Lawtons are a large family in this country,'' 
Mamma said, "and some of them were very rich." 

"Were Papa’s folks rich?” Wistaria asked. 

"I never saw any of them," Mamma answered, 
"except one sister, who came to see us after our mar- 
riage. She moved West, and I never heard any more 
of the Lawtons. I suppose they had troubles of their 
own, and we had too many." 

She shed a few tears and Regina asked, 

"Is the head of the Lawton firm of that name? He 
might be a relative. Did you see him?” 

"I saw him and felt him," Lafe answered. "He 
gave me a look that went right through me, like an 
electric shock. He’s a neat-looking man, stylish, you 
know, like all the business swells, and you only see 
him as he goes by." 

"When he hears you are a Lawton he may take a 
second look at you,” said Wistaria slyly. "Maybe he 
is looking for lost relatives. Oh, if our Papa would 
only come back that way, rich and stylish, and live 
happy for ever after." 

"It would be nice,” Miss Devere said. "It does 
happen sometimes, and one should pray for it. Now 
suppose Papa really came back, and bought this house, 
and kept everything a secret, until the last minute, and 
then came in and said, everything here is yours, what 
do you think would happen?" 

"I would rise up and say. Father dear, we are all 
yours,” said Lafe. 

"I would rise up and say. Father dear, yours is all 
mine," said Wistaria. 

"I would rise up and say. Father dear, mine is all 
yours,” said Regina. 


The Old House Restored 197 

^^And what would you say, Mamma?” the three 
sang together. 

‘‘I would say, Papa, it has been so long, but wel- 
come,” said Mamma, who burst out crying, overcome 
by that secret grief always present to her. They con- 
soled her, and Miss Devere said in a very serious tone, 
as if the thing was to happen right then, 

‘T want to give you all a bit of advice, the last bit 
for a month: when he does come make much of him, 
give him the best room, and persuade him to stay a 
while.” 

How they laughed at this suggestion. 

^Tf I had a father,” Lafe began, “Fd get too proud 
for the Ferry. It would be an entirely new feeling. 
Fd want to show him around the town like a curiosity 
just to hear people say: well, well, the Lawtons have 
a father.” 

Miss Devere was satisfied with the chatter of the 
evening. Lawton, even as a tramp, would get a wel- 
come among these affectionate and forgiving people, 
who forgot their wrongs in the natural longing for the 
head and protector of the little flock. Mamma went 
into a day-dream while the children talked, and Miss 
Devere knew that the poor soul was walking some 
lovely lane of the past with the lost husband. 


CHAPTER XXXI 
the old house restored 

V ERY lonesome was the house when the gentle 
and majestic Miss Devere had departed. Were 
it not that the restoring of the old house had 
begun, and they had so much to interest them, the 
children would have mourned her absence. Lafe and 
Charlie were never tired following the work of the 


igS The Boy Who Came Back 

carpenters, and plumbers and painters. Only a few 
men were employed, but they worked with great 
speed. One could see each day’s progress very clearly. 
It was like telling a story. First the plumbers and 
masons went over the foundations and the piping, and 
put in very nice, plain, but intricate work. Just be- 
fore they finished the carpenters came along, and 
both forces worked together. When they had done 
the old house had become a solid, complete structure, 
rough and ragged, but piped, for rain outside, for heat 
and water inside, against water in the foundations. 
Then the plasterers did their work along with the elec- 
tricians, and meanwhile the painters were at work 
outside and inside. When they had made an end, 
laborers put the grounds in good shape, with cement 
walks, little arbors here and there, beautiful hedges 
and bushes and vines everywhere. It was a wonder- 
ful sight when the last workman had departed. No 
one would ever believe that an old mansion could be 
rescued from decay so speedily and made to look so 
lovely. Two decorators arrived last to give the deli- 
cate touches to the interiors. Then they placed the 
furniture and handed the keys to Mrs. Lawton. There 
was nothing further to be done, but let the owner 
take possession. The family had lived in one room 
after another as the work proceeded, and now they 
had returned to the humbler quarters of the kitchen 
and the servants’ rooms. The agent had informed 
them that no hurry was required for their departure, 
as it might be some time before the owner could take 
possession. He was travelling, or very busy. They 
had the fine house to themselves. 

“I feel as if I fitted in here,” Lafe said one evening, 
as they sat in the reception room, entertaining Father 
Sherwood and Charlie Haven. 

“Some day you may have a house as good,” said 
the priest. 


The Old House Restored ipQ 

‘'One must be considerable of a man to get the 
money for a place so grand/' Lafe answered. 

“What sort of a man is your new boss?" Charlie 
asked. 

“This sort," Lafe replied, with a wave of his hand. 
“I made his acquaintance the other day. He stopped 
at the chief clerk’s desk near mine, and the clerk said, 
‘By the way, Mr. Lawton, this boy is a namesake of 
yours. Lafayette Lawton, meet Mr. Lawton.’ The 
great man bowed and smiled and I was just able to 
say, ‘Pleased to meet you,’ before I collapsed. ‘Oh, this 
is the boy who had a letter of introduction from my 
friend Father Sherwood? I hope you like your po- 
sition.’ I don’t know what I said. Either I didn’t 
hear myself say it, or I forget it. I hear them say 
around the office that he is a very quiet man, 
kind of sad in his way, like all men with too much 
money.’’ 

“That’s a new idea,’’ Father Sherwood remarked. 
“Sad because they have too much money?’’ 

“No, sad because they want more and can’t get 
it.’’ 

“That’s more like it,’’ the priest said laughing. 

“Then the funny thing happened,’’ Lafe went on. 
“The chief clerk said to me, ‘If you know a clever girl 
in your town who can do stenography and has experi- 
ence, there’s a neat job waiting for her in the office 
of the boss.’ And I said, ‘That girl lives right in my 
family, and is a sister of mine by marriage. Her 
name is Regina, and she has a good position now. But 
if a better salary, with not too much work, came 
along, she would consider it.’ ‘Same recommendation 
as yours ?’ said he. ‘Same, but better, for there is more 
confidence in it,’ I said. ‘Then the job is hers when she 
wants it.’ So in a week Regina will take her place in 
the private office, and it will surely be the Lawton 
Manufacturing Co. Wistaria, your turn next.’’ 


200 


The Boy Who Came Back 


“I disdain offices. I am looking for a career,” Wis- 
taria answered. 

Father Sherwood congratulated the two on their 
positions, and described the virtues of Mr. Lawton, 
also his misfortunes, as it would seem that he had 
lost a very promising family and had taken it very 
much to heart. The neighbors naturally thought the 
Lawton family very lucky to have charge of the hand- 
some house, and came to see it in numbers, so that 
Mamma felt herself rising to a place of importance 
in Ferry society as the representative of the owner. 
All her old friends came to see her and brought new 
ones. Tea was often served in the handsome kitchen 
to the visitors. People asked if there were any re- 
lationship between the employer and the Lawtons. 

They also asked who owned the new house and 
could get no answer. There was only an agent, and 
he spoke vaguely of a gentleman far away, who would 
soon take possession. Father Sherwood enjoyed the 
situation very much, for it was like a game, with 
inquisitive people asking questions very near the 
truth, although they knew nothing, and suspected 
nothing, about the real facts. He himself was the 
director of the game. Regina began to like Mr. Law- 
ton. She was the most retiring and innocent of girls, 
and kept her thoughts out of the business of others. 
She did not see the loving looks which Mr. Lawton 
gave her as she bent over her work, but she felt them. 
A deep pity for him awoke in her heart, after the 
priest had mentioned the loss of his family. How 
she and her family had mourned the loss of their fa- 
ther, how they had suffered by his failure and deser- 
tion, she thought; and what must be the sadness of a 
man who had lost his entire family by some misfor- 
tune! Occasionally he visited Father Sherwood and 
walked with the priest around the town. No one 
recognized him. Lawton the failure had been a young 


The Old House Restored 


201 


man, with a smooth face, and easy-going manner, and 
of slender build. Lawton the success was bearded, 
well dressed, commanding, and severe. He was fol- 
lowing the advice of the priest carefully. By degrees 
he was getting more intimate with his son and daugh- 
ter, and by arrangement with Miss Devere Wistaria 
was brought to the office, just to visit Regina, but 
really to let her father see her. And right there and 
then Mr. Lawton and Miss Devere discovered that 
they had known each other for many years, and noth- 
ing would do Mr. Lawton but that the ladies should 
lunch with him for old times' sake. Lafayette could 
not quite get his bearings when he saw the three ladies 
going out in Mr. Lawton’s company, and heard from 
the chief clerk that they were the guests of the great 
man. However, it was good luck and had to be taken 
with deep respect. He began to dream of the day 
when the great man would say to him casually, as he 
often did to the chief clerk: 

''Mr. Lawton, or, perhaps, Lafayette, if you are 
not too occupied I’ll be delighted with your company 
today at lunch.” 

"Thanks, with pleasure,” he heard himself saying. 

Meanwhile the lunch was going on next door, and 
the three ladies were chatting pleasantly with the head 
of the firm. He hardly took his eyes off Wistaria. 
She was no more the eccentric child of the early 
Spring. Under Miss Devere’s kind training she had 
become a sensible child, her good looks had increased, 
and her peculiar talents had developed. She was still 
the child, but already the grace of youth was beginning 
to shine through. The delighted father looked from 
one daughter to the other, not knowing which to love 
and admire more; for while Wistaria was beautiful, 
there was something in the gentle manners of Regina 
that won the heart. Miss Devere was afraid that the 
father would declare himself on the spot and spoil 


202 


The Boy Who Came Back 


the romance. She warned him with her eyes. They 
had agreed to wait for Father Sherwood's directions 
in making the facts known. It came about quite nat- 
urally that the three children found themselves in their 
father’s company now and then, until they began to be 
familiar with him. From Father Sherwood and Miss 
Devere he learned all about their hardships and 
struggles, and their habits and ways. He could see 
that Regina was virtuous and severe. Wistaria inclined 
to childishness, and Lafayette very much as he was at 
the same age, plenty of character but freakish. One 
summer of effort and trouble and training had reduced 
the Lawton weaknesses. Lafayette after Beau’s death 
seemed to be another person. He had dropped the 
old life and its ways like old clothes. He could not 
see the gang, or the lumber yard, or the gambling at 
all. He could not even understand why he hung on 
to them so long. He asked the priest about it. 

“It is this way, Lafayette,” said Father Sherwood. 
“In life we are travelling a road crowded with people. 
We are never alone. We get used to certain people 
and certain tricks. When we resolve to change to 
another road, we cannot get rid of the old road on the 
instant. The people and the tricks hang on. We have 
to make a fight to shake them off. That is why a new 
country is so promising. You open it up, and you 
don’t have to fight old people, old customs, old laws, 
and the like. Everything is new. You came out of 
the Home with new resolutions, but all your old 
friends and habits tried to drag you back to the old 
ways.” 

He loved to talk with the priest on these important 
matters, because Father Sherwood had such clear ex- 
planations and fine stories to illustrate them. 

*'And the mean way I acted to Charlie Haven, my 
best friend. How can a man explain such craziness 
to himself?’^ 


The Old House Restored 


203 


*We are always standing in our own light/* said 
Father Sherwood. “You could see that Charlie was 
a friend, but you saw another thing better, that you 
did not like him, because he had nice ways, which you 
thought lady-like, until he hammered you. We stand 
in our own light, and others help the shadow, and it is 
often a wonder that we get anywhere.*' 

“And now the whole thing is gone out of my mind, 
I would die for Charlie, and I never think of the gang. 
Who can explain such things? They look foolish to 
me. Nothing has happened to make a change, except 
Beau's death, and that had not much to do with these 
things." 

“Well, here's a match," said the priest, “and there's 
a fuse, and the fuse leads to powder, and the powder 
blows up, and flings a big stone across a field and kills 
a cow. Yet this little match is half a mile from the 
cow, and neither knows anything about the other. 
Beau's death let loose a lot of things that were doing 
nothing. It opened up something in you that was 
asleep. Now it is working. When a man crosses the 
desert in the hot sun without food or drink and comes 
near a terrible death, you never again hear him growl- 
ing over plain bread and butter and water in a cool 
kitchen." 

The lad laughed heartily and clapped his hands. 

“That is just it. Father. The bitter makes every- 
thing sweet. Sweet things spoil the taste. Beau's 
death was the bitter that made so many things sweet 
to me." 

“Very well said, my boy. But now to take up an- 
other matter. Where are you going to live, and when 
are you going to move?" 

“The agent says we needn’t hurry, and if that means 
till next Spring why should we worry? But I have 
my eye on a neat place in Maple Street anyway.” 

It was then that Lafe began to think about their 


204 


The Boy Who Came Back 


present happy condition. There was something mys- 
terious about it, yet no one could say why. The gos- 
sips were asking questions about the unknown pro- 
prietor, about the luck of the Lawtons in getting paid 
for their care of the property and rent free. Was 
there anything beneath all this luck? The gossips 
began to shake their heads, but they could not even 
frame a decent explanation. It occurred to Lafayette 
that it might pay to discover the owner of the house. 
He had a casual chat with the agent, who lived in the 
next town. 

“Do you know that the people will soon be calling 
that house the Mystery House, if something doesn^t 
happen soon?” he suggested. “The tongues are all 
wagging about the owner that won’t come home.” 

“Why should he worry ? But there’s no secret about 
it. The contractor for the job knew it. I knew it. 
The man paid his bills. Nobody here knows him, so 
what use to mention his name ? His name is the same 
as yours, and he runs a business in the city. D’ye 
know him?” 

“Yes, I work for him, but he never mentioned the 
house.” Lafayette walked away with his head spin- 
ning from surprise. 


CHAPTER XXXII 

THE DREAM COMES TRUE 

F ather SHERWOOD explained to Miss Devere 
on a certain day the plan which he had made to 
fit the Lawtons to their new fortune, and how 
that plan was to be carried out. It was a lovely day 
towards the end of October, and the Ferry in the 
gorgeous dress and the brilliant sunshine of Autumn 


The Dream Comes True 205 

looked superb. It was a glorious day to tell good 
news to simple people like the Lawtons. 

‘‘This is the plan/^ said the priest to Miss Devere, 
as they sat in his office. “I shall tell the story to 
Lafayette, who has been sent home early by his father 
with a message for me. He will be here by four 
o'clock. At the same hour you will be breaking the 
good news to Mamma down at the villa. In the city 
Papa will be explaining matters to Regina and Wis- 
taria. At five o'clock Papa and the girls will ride up 
from the city to the Lawton villa, and there have a 
family reunion. The rest is in the hands of God." 

“It is the prettiest piece of drama I ever played in," 
said Miss Devere, “and I imagine I understand why 
you are so careful." 

“Well, you know the Lawtons," he answered. 
“There is dynamite in their blood. And you know 
what sudden prosperity will do to a human being 
sometimes. I have seen queer cases. I trust to the 
father's bitter experience, also to what was done for 
the family during the summer, to ward off explosions. 
It would be such a pity, after all your labor and this 
good fortune, if the poor souls should sag." 

“They won't," Miss Devere said with emphasis, “if 
I had to live with them for the next five years." 

And as the time for action had come she went off 
to her task, leaving the priest free for his work. La- 
fayette arrived promptly at four with a letter, which 
Father Sherwood read and tore up. 

“This is your lucky day," said he to the boy. “Sit 
down while I tell you about it. How is everything 
going?" 

“In the best style. Father. I never felt happier. I 
feel as if I owned a lot of real estate, which is going 
up in price twenty per cent, a month." 

“You are not far from that good fortune," the 


2o6 


The Boy Who Came Back 

priest replied. “I am wondering if you are quite fitted 
for it. You know good luck occasionally upsets a 
chap. You remember when you left the Home, how 
the sense of freedom upset you?’* 

‘'Oh, do I remember? But all that is gone by, like 
water under a bridge. You could give me a gold mine 
tonight, and I’d go to bed as I do now with half a 
dollar in my jeans — my pockets, I mean.” 

“That’s what I would expect. But I really have 
wonderful news for you. I have learned for certain 
that your father is not dead, and that he wants to 
come back to his family and do his duty as a father.” 

“He will be welcome,” said Lafayette, “and why 
doesn’t he come ?” 

“A little shy perhaps. Shyness runs in the Lawton 
family.” 

“He mustn’t be feeling well if he has that complaint. 
Is he in good shape, that is, does he think he can take 
care of the family?” 

“Well, he just built over an old house into a hand- 
some residence for his family,” said the priest. “Did 
you ever hear who was the owner of your house ?” 

“Yes, Mr. Lawton.” 

Then the boy lost his jaunty manner and turned 
pale. 

“Oh, Father, you don’t mean to say that George 
Washington Lawton of our firm is our father?” 

The priest nodded and the boy began to tremble; 
then he started to cheer. 

“You see, it was this way,” said Father Sher^vood, 
and he told the entire story while Lafayette was get- 
ting his feelings under control. 

“Now,” said he in conclusion, “the girls have been 
notified, and your mother, and there will be nothing 
to do but meet and enjoy your good fortune. Except 
this : be sure to take everything as if you had expected 
it. Let there be no extra talk, no fuss, no display. The 


The Dream Comes True 


207 


town will do enough of that. And as a sign of grati- 
tude to God for His benevolence, you should think 
over a particular thing to do in His honor.” 

“I know it now,” said Lafe with deep feeling. '‘I’m 
going to do my best for the gang, to coax them out 
of their mean ways, to get them good jobs, to help 
them in whatever way I can. For some of them were 
fine boys, with just a little twist in them, like I had.” 

“The very thing,” said the priest. “Now on your 
way home go into the church and promise Our Lord 
that good work. You can rely on me to help you too.” 

Meanwhile Miss Devere sat with Mamma and di- 
rected the talk into old times and the ways of her 
husband. When the placid lady was in full speed, 
Miss Devere said: 

“Father Sherwood knows that your husband is alive 
and in New York.” 

“I’m not surprised,” Mamma remarked with just a 
little flutter. 

“He is the gentleman for whom the children work,” 
Miss Devere continued, “and he owns this house. He 
is coming up this evening, if you do not mind, and 
you are all to stay in this house for good.” 

“Where should he go but to his own house?” 
Mamma observed placidly. “I’m so glad the house is 
ready for him. I took such pains with it yesterday. 
I always felt that George would make a good business 
man, if he only applied himself. I wonder how he 
did it in so short a time.” 

So that gave Miss Devere her opportunity to tell 
the whole story, which she did with great humor, mak- 
ing it as plain as day and as natural as the opening 
of a door. Then Lafayette came in like a big wind, 
and hugged Mamma and Miss Devere, and cheered 
and made speeches of welcome to the father who had 
become so great a man while everybody thought him 
a tramp. 


2o8 The Boy, Who Came Back 

‘‘I do hope this excitement will not bring on an 
attack/’ Mamma said. “You know I always got one 
after a heavy washing, but I feel so good with this 
news that I should expect to escape.” 

“Mamma, you are to be a great lady from this time 
on, and if you want to have an attack, you shall have 
it,” Lafayette said. “However, this particular one 
must be put away until afterwards.” 

“Well, we must get ready for Papa’s coming,” said 
Mamma. 

“And I must get back to the city,” said Miss 
Devere. 

“And you must not,” the Lawtons said together. 
“You must be at the first dinner, and you may help 
to get it. And when the girls come in you may go 
upstairs until the excitement is over.” 

Papa did not find it easy to make his explanation to 
his two daughters in the office. He was a shy man, 
and since his conscience had waked up he had a great 
horror of his desertion of the family, and all his think- 
ing did not show him how he could make up for so 
great a sin. Moreover, Regina and Wistaria had grown 
into two lovely girls under the kindly treatment of 
good fortune and Miss Devere together. Had they 
been of a coarse, homely mould he might have found 
more confidence in making his confession and repara- 
tion. When the office force had all gone home, and 
Wistaria was waiting for Regina, who was waiting for 
the last instructions of Mr. Lawton, he beckoned Wis- 
taria to a seat near him, coughed once or twice, shook 
up the papers on the desk, and said very humbly: 

“I have often wondered. Miss Lawton, seeing the 
similarity of our names, that you never connected me 
with memories of — of your family. I suppose you 
recall your father?” 

“Not very well, but I do recall him slightly,” Regina 
answered. “Were you any relation of his?” 


The Dream Comes True 


209 


*‘Why yes — that is, I happen to be the man himself,’' 
he stammered. 

Regina regarded him vaguely, not knowing just how 
to take this statement. 

“Why, Regina,” Wistaria almost screamed, “he is 
our Papa!” 

Regina would have rebuked her but for the look on 
Mr. Lawton’s face. 

“Do you mean that you are our George Washington 
Lawton?” said she. 

“Your unfortunate father,” he replied, “who is 
anxious to make up to you for the past, and has money 
enough to do it with. If you will only let me.” 

Wistaria promptly put her arms about him and 
kissed him. Regina was so appalled by her own 
thoughts and feelings that she could not move. It 
shocked her that she did not recognize him from the 
first, and then that he should have kept himself away, 
and then that he was a rich man, and last of all that 
the Lawtons should have a father again like other 
people. When she had all this settled in her mind, 
she shook hands with him and kissed him. 

“How glad Mamma will be,” was her one comment. 

“Miss Devere has told her, and Father Sherwood 
has told Lafayette,” said Mr. Lawton, “and they are 
all waiting for us at home, our home, for it was I who 
rebuilt the old house, and there we shall gather to- 
night for a genuine house-warming.” 

The girls stared and hugged each other and began to 
cry; but Papa hurried them out to the street, where 
his automobile was waiting, and in they stepped and 
glided away like millionaires. No more rushing for 
subways and trains, no more climbing the one hundred 
steps to the main street of the Ferry, but instead one 
lovely ride from the office to the front door. That 
was a ride such as no queen ever enjoyed more on her 
way to take her throne. They drove up to the lovely 


210 


The Boy Who Came Back 


house, where the door flew open to display Lafayette 
and Miss Devere ready to receive them. Such a home- 
coming! Lafayette jumped into his father’s arms and 
they hugged each other like bears; and then the boy 
led the man to the back room where Mamma was wait- 
ing for him; and he closed the door on the two so 
long separated and returned to the ladies. In the end 
they all assembled quite comfortably in the dining- 
room, where Miss Devere and Lafayette did the wait- 
ing on the table, and everybody talked at once, explain- 
ing the surmises and suspicions which had so often 
floated into their minds and out again concerning the 
owner of the house and the fate of Papa. When they 
got down to the level again, the situation was discussed 
sensibly, and it was decided that they should continue 
for some time their present mode of life, until the 
town had got used to the surprise. People saw Regina 
and her brother riding to the city the next morning 
with a strange gentleman, and riding back again in 
the evening. This was an event for the gossips, who 
put two and two together and made out a large sum 
of marriage and what not. But the local paper ex- 
plained the matter properly on Friday, with the story 
of Mr. Lawton’s return, his good business, and his fine 
house. He had decided to live among his old neigh- 
bors and acquaintances and to take an interest in 
Silver Ferry, such as a man of his position could 
properly take. A long illness had detained him in the 
far West, but the far West had made up for this cold 
reception by giving him a great opportunity. After 
that the gossips went quite mad. They rushed to Mrs. 
Lawton for the details and were received in the parlor. 
They were at the late Mass on Sunday to see the 
family make their entrance as notable members of the 
parish. Some were disappointed that the Lawtons 
took the change so easily, dressing about the same, 
going to work as usual, and depending for the house 


The Bright Morning 


2II 


work on occasional help. Happiness radiated from the 
parents and the children. Lafayette brought Charlie 
Haven to live a few days in his own suite of rooms. 
Together they planned the redemption of the gang 
through kindness and aid and encouragement. No 
longer was it a question of means. Papa had enough 
money to make any plan go, and he was willing they 
should use it in so fine an enterprise. The priest 
promised to direct the scheme. All their troubles 
seemed to be at an end. As Lafayette said: 

“When I came back, I knew I was coming to some- 
thing good; but I never dreamed it meant a father, 
a fortune, and a big chance in life.’’ 

“When God answers your prayers,” Father Sher- 
wood said to Regina, “He does it as onlv the King 
can, with all His riches.” 


CHAPTER XXXIII 

THE BRIGHT MORNING 

T he years fly away very rapidly, although in 
Silver Ferry they linger more lazily perhaps 
than in most places. That is because the vil- 
lagers take life more gently and sensibly than city 
people, look after comfort rather than money, and 
therefore really get more comfort than money. Three 
years have passed since the death of Rochambeau and 
the return of Papa. If you asked what happened in 
that period of time the answer of everybody would 
be: nothing. One day had been so much like an- 
other, that is, so pleasant and smooth, that it seemed 
as if nothing happened but the rising of the sun 
and the setting of the same. Palisade Street looked 
specially lovely. The new house had improved the 


212 


The Boy Who Came Back 


entire neighborhood, because every dweller on the 
street, who could afford paint and nails, forced into 
action by good example, repaired his house, his fence, 
his garden, dressed it v/ith ornament, so that the Law- 
ton house was no longer the brightest spot in that 
vicinity. It was summer, and Miss Devere sat on the 
back veranda watching the lights on the river, and 
chatting with two young men in her pleasant way. 
Charlie Haven and Lafayette were no longer boys, 
except in their simplicity and gaiety. How do you 
think they looked? You remember that Charlie used 
to be thin-faced, with a long, pointed nose, while La- 
fayette had a robust form and a straight nose with a 
comical tip on it; and in the matter of dressing they 
had one suit for work and one for Sundays, and did 
the best they could ; and Charlie talked very good En- 
glish, while his chum used slang and made comical 
remarks when he could. What a difference now! 
Charlie had grown a few inches, his light hair looked 
fine, his face was so plump that his nose seemed to be 
shorter and without sharpness ; his blue suit and grey 
hat and neat shoes and heliotrope tie set him off well ; 
and he looked as if the whole world was young and 
he owned it. All the boys know that look. Lafayette 
sat at the other side of Miss Devere, whom he still 
called the Queen, paying her homage. He wore a 
gray suit, brown hat, brown tie, brown shoes, grey silk 
socks, in the latest style; he pulled up his trousers 
when he sat to save the knees; and his linen was of 
the daintiest. When he talked he mimicked the English 
accent so as to take the rough edge off his old accent. 
You would not find in the whole country two more 
gentlemanly boys. 

“Which do I like best,’’ Miss Devere was saying. 
“I like him best who likes me best, of course. Now 
you may settle between you that puzzle.” 

“Easy matter,” said Charlie. “Which of us, do you 
think, likes you best?” 


The Bright Morning 213 

*^The answer would not solve the puzzle. I am a 
poor guesser.” 

“You couldn’t be that if you tried,” said Lafayette. 

“And a woman guesses better than she thinks,” 
Charlie said slyly. 

“That may be a fling at woman,” Miss Devere 
answered. 

“He is always having a fling at the poor girls any- 
way.” 

“Then he will surely marry a woman who will de- 
serve all that may be said about her. Minerva pun- 
ishes critics that way.” 

“Who’s Minerva? Does she live around here?” 
Lafayette remarked. 

“If she does, it must be in the disguise of a book 
agent. No one in the Ferry seems to know the great 
dame.” 

“Oh, she’s great, is she?” Charlie cried. “Here’s 
Regina coming. Maybe she knows Minerva. Hey, 
Miss Lawton, do you know Minerva?” 

Regina had never heard of the personage and was 
not interested. She had just come from catechism 
school and library work, looking as pretty as a flower 
and as happy as an angel. Her brother gave her a 
seat, took off her hat, sat beside her, pinched her 
cheek and said: 

“My darling of a sister!” 

“I should be saying that, not you,” said Charlie. 

“My children, are you asking my consent? Join 
right hands. Bless you !” 

And he went through the pantomime of the father 
in the play blessing the hero and heroine at the end 
of the drama. They all smiled, but Regina said in her 
sweet, serious way: 

“If ever I get married, I shall want a husband like 
Charlie.” 

“How about a chap like me for a substitute,” La- 
fayette remarked. 


214 


The Boy Who Came Back 


“Only as a sub, brother dear/’ 

“Crushed!” Lafayette cried. 

“If I ever get married,” Miss Devere said, “I shall 
want a husband the exact duplicate of Lafayette.” 

“Now I know who you think likes you best,” 
Charlie answered. 

So they went on with their pleasant trifling. Be- 
tween them was true affection, perfect understanding, 
and deep sympathy. Presently Wistaria appeared, no 
longer the delicate, irritable, dreaming child, but a tall, 
handsome, sensible girl, with the graceful manners of 
Miss Devere. She had given herself to the training 
of the Queen, and the result was quite touching. Fi- 
ally came Mamma, no more the slave of the washtub, 
but plump and well-dressed, placid and quiet as usual, 
very little troubled by the old illness. The best medical 
aid had at least diminished the violence of the at- 
tacks. How happy they all were ! Papa had been doz- 
ing in his room until the chatter of their voices brought 
him into the party. He was still the quiet, humble 
penitent, who could never forgive himself for his early 
sins, and tried to remain in the background. But the 
children were so proud of him, that he should be the 
great man of the parish, and so good a business man, 
that he had to go everywhere and be petted and flat- 
tered and coaxed and cajoled all the time. As he con- 
fided to Miss Devere, he could not resist them, and 
could not understand how he could have children so 
fine and loving, after his cruel neglect of ten years. 
After a while Charlie caught sight of something and 
whispered to his friend: 

“Father Sherwood is coming and we had better go 
while the going is good, for he never comes around 
at this hour on Sunday unless he has a hard job for 
you and me.” 

“Right,” Lafe answered. “Pll let him in, you skip 


The Bright Morning 


215 


into the house and get out any way, and I’ll follow 
when he joins the family.” 

But this scheme was nipped at once by an order 
from the priest that no one should leave the veranda 
without his permission. He knew what he had come 
for and he knew the tricks of his boys. 

‘*You all know,” said he after the usual greetings, 
‘‘that the bazaar is now to the front.” 

“We do,” all said together like a chant. 

“And let me say right here, before it goes too far,” 
Charlie chanted, “that I am not on the entertainment 
committee and take no part in the shows.” 

“Same here,” chanted Lafayette. 

“I agree,” the priest said gravely. “You did so 
well in the past three years that I hereby release you 
from the service.” 

The lads gave three low cheers and shook nands. 
Mamma laughed. 

“Anyhow you couldn’t act, Charlie, it’s a mercy to 
the people.” 

“And you couldn’t sing, Lafe, even if you thought 
you could.” 

“But while thus freeing you, on the strength of 
past service, from the dramatic department,” Father 
Sherwood continued, “I shall require you to contest 
for a gold watch, which has just been presented to 
Regina’s table.” 

The young men fainted in each other’s arms, fanned 
themselves with their hats and chanted together. 

“We return to the stage for a farewell tour.” 

They were caught in the snare, and had to accept 
the contest, whose profits were all to go to Regina’s 
table. Glad indeed were they to accept the labor, 
happy to help the priest in all his enterprises. How 
much he had helped them, how much he was doing 
for them daily, what pride he took in their social and 


2i6 


The Boy Who Came Back 


business success! Therefore a great part of their 
time was given to the work of the parish. While they 
were talking over details a catlike figure slipped like 
a shadow along the edge of the park and over a 
wall towards the river. It was Lanky Bissell, the leader 
of the gang. Charlie nudged his friend. 

'‘Poor Lanky,” said Lafayette, “he’s the last of the 
gang, but he sticks to his job. He’s always in hope 
of getting up another gang. He pretends to be angry 
with me, but an occasional dollar when he is short 
on cash makes it all up.” 

“You certainly had great success with the gang,” the 
priest said. 

“It was just as I told you, Father,” Lafayette re- 
plied. “Most of those boys were shy chaps, who could 
never get or could never hold a good job. When they 
got discouraged they turned to loafing. As soon as 
Papa here found the way to start them right, they 
lost interest in loafing and in the gang. I think we’ll 
get Lanky sometime at that. He has a wild west idea 
that may interest him.” 

“I have the place for him and the cash,” said Papa. 

After a little the boys went off to their own schemes, 
and Father Sherwood said to Regina. 

“Well, God gave two answers to your prayers, I 
think.” 

“Rather three,” Regina answered looking at Miss 
Devere. 

“After all, Lafayette was the direct answer,” the 
Queen said. “There is some primal force in him, un- 
like the common anyway, whatever it is. He took 
some thought and labor out of us all, and much im- 
patience out of you, Regina, as gold in the ore takes 
the strength out of men to get it. But now that he 
has found himself, what a real man he is going to 
make.” 

“A real man,” Father Sherwooa repeated. “What 


The Bright Morning 


2i7 

a rare thing in life ! If I had the ownership of educa- 
tion I think I would direct it towards making real 
men and real women. We have millions of people, 
and why are real men and real women so few? We 
are indeed born human, but we are not born men and 
women. These must be developed out of the weak, 
rough stuff of creation. Lafayette has made a man 
of Charlie, yet Charlie had a better training.'’ 

They sat long discussing the good points of the boys, 
their good positions in the company, their promise for 
the future. Father Sherwood described the happiness 
which the Lawtons had enjoyed since the death of 
Beau. In that time there had not been even a hint 
of storm in the Lawton household. Lafayette had run 
along like a train on the track, working and earning, 
keeping clear of trouble, helping other boys into steadi- 
ness and goodness, loving and thoughtful towards the 
family, and always planning something better for all 
around him. He had studied under Miss Devere, 
learning the little social arts, improving his speech 
and manners, until he had become the most popular 
lad in the town. Under Papa's kind care the family 
had moved ahead. Wistaria still read novels, but of a 
better sort than The Mysterious Bride. Regina was 
devoted to church affairs. Mamma remained a simple, 
faithful soul, thinking more of others, particularly the 
poor and suffering, than herself. Mr. Lawton lived 
in a state of perfect happiness, doing all possible to 
help those who had helped his family while he was 
absent. He could never do enough for Father Sher- 
wood, and Miss Devere he so assisted that she became 
quite famous in her line. From the Lawtons disap- 
peared all the old recklessness, for the death of Beau 
had made them so responsible, filled them so with 
horror of sin and terror of judgment, that order be- 
came the great mark of their daily life. In that happy 


2i8 


The Boy Who Came Back 


state we leave them, with regret, but also with satis- 
faction. It is not easy to part with lovable people, 
but it is pleasant in the parting to know that we leave 
them prosperous and happy in God’s service. 


THE END 


PRINTED BY BLASE BENZIGER & CO., INC., NEW YORK 







fTi 


<0 






m 


L-'ir' 




‘i<ur* 




-fx 


n 




!■ -'• 


Si 




- V 

i>ir 








•/YW 


V -.^■> 


(«/» 






;H’'; 


;<)«:' '"*"■■ .■‘S H (i; 

• ■ . *rfs. yJi.^•^' -' Vv.v.,- 




Xi- *' Y 












''WiW. • rt • ‘V -f ■ ^ 

'• ‘* ^■■^. I 

^ ^ T'" V . \ ^;i.v?;,L . fj . I— 





Al. . 


. k M 






' 4 i 


A 




■'>' ■'•.N’-T- 
’ .4 M,’ > 

I . » • I '. 


\'it 


n 


M :i» 


\u 


,> . -' 1 ^ 




IV] 


5 v;;i. 


■‘/K/v: 

i''' 'A,!;/ ■ 


A '• 









ft 


h: 





'' I . 






.4 ’ ' 




■hbubk . ..-'' \.,^ !\\'W-' 

■'■ ;> <:■"■ '. ' ' /.J '.■■>*■;«,' Vfif*! 

, -■ ’ . • ■■ ■ f '■” V ' V'v'*V',V??^ 

iff. ■' i^V. V, ;,; ,Vi'" 1? 

wp ;"■::. 


yf 


“^,:,Mii''’;y:iV .V; ."’■n ' .■■■&■ ' '•«.■” 

:;«|fet? -St y :,i 


Vf '‘'I' " Ai'/J 




'■ i'Mm : \y.&m ■'- ■ 

.' ■ j,,,yw/if^ 3 i ■ .V <■ rf. 


«v fj 


v^' t 1 -'v " 


^4. 


» *1 






/ :i.‘.'.i{-v.»‘., 

' 'f 


.A 4 




W. 






U,<, • i 


hi: 






i 


y. 


.\ * 


y:r;A 


'jta 


i\ • -'» . ...» 








'* ■ ’ ■ 


\s. 


'rv 

w * 




.k' 


'■ i> s ."A,'. .’ 

i * ““ *. • • I . • 

' i.' . '•■'■' 

fiSSM'.\ >■ .'■•■/ '■•y,'^' ■ ■'■ 


nfy>.^«' _ 




r''';> . ^♦/ijVv. ■ /r‘i ' ■ *• 



*■ V 





. a; SJ ■'’ 


'■ f. 

1 1 I 

V.*i 


f'- 


>' » ’- 


•i ■ 

f 


♦» .' 


.• * 

*. - 


.y 


’■iJi-y Aty-yi ■. • ‘ .r. . ^.sMr •' ' 


<■- laS' 


>> y 

'i»*. 


A r 


I* 


' » •■'- ,*' 
. • 


y\:*iL 


-y '“ 


9 

» . *■ 
.f 

'■' 4 ' . 

4 j 


« / » 

• 

** 

V/r’^ 

• 

' ■' ‘'iTi 


'f^ 


yyS^'V '-*’ ' • . ' ■ .'/■. •■ 



% 


‘Ik ''> 

J^AM , I • 














y; 


8 


'■*' ' ‘ yh 


m 




* ' f- ■• ■ ■ ••■ ' -tiSm 

■'• ■ .', •: 'VAIJB 

■ '■;>■ V. vyf: 
ay . 7JA./)X^:¥&Ly* ,,; '*A 'JW 






y (; 




\K‘ 




. -i' ' •»*.■'? 


' '*l ■■' 

































library of congress 



0 


